User Guide
Your Palm® Treo™ 755P Smartphone
Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
What’s in the box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
What do I need to get started? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Where to learn more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Chapter 1: Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Installing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Maximizing battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Setting up your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Synchronizing information—the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Chapter 2: Moving around on your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Chapter 3: Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Turning your smartphone on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
What can I do when I’m on a call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Viewing minutes usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
C O N T E N T S
iii
Using a phone headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Chapter 4: Your email and other messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
The Wireless Sync application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
The VersaMail® application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
BroadbandAccess Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Connections with Bluetooth® devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Chapter 6: Your photos, videos, and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Camera and Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Pics & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
145
Pocket Tunes™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 7: Your personal information organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Chapter 8: Your memos and documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Documents To Go® Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
C O N T E N T S
iv
Chapter 9: Your application and info management tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Viewing application info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Chapter 10: Your personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
System sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Locking your smartphone and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Chapter 11: Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Desktop software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Resetting your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Hands-free devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
C O N T E N T S
v
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Making room on your Treo™ smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Important safety and legal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
C O N T E N T S
vi
Welcome
DID YOU KNOW? The Verizon Wireless
business-to-business sales channel offers a
Treo 755P smartphone without a camera. If
you purchased your smartphone from this
channel, check the package to see if your
smartphone includes a camera.
Congratulations on the purchase of your
Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone! In one
compact and indispensable device, you
now have all of the following:
•
•
•
Text and multimedia messaging
A media player
•
•
•
An advanced mobile smartphone
Mobile email (corporate and personal)
Productivity software
High-speed Internet connection and
data transfer with NationalAccess and
BroadbandAccess support
This guide helps you set up your Treo
smartphone and learn to use it.
®
•
Palm OS organizer applications
NOTE Phone and text messaging services
require a service contract with Verizon
Wireless. Web, email, and multimedia
messaging services require a service
contract and high-speed data service from
Verizon Wireless. Data speeds vary based
on network availability and capacity.
KEY TERM Organizer applications: The
Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, and Memos
applications are collectively referred to as
organizer or PIM (personal information
manager) applications.
•
•
Expansion capability (mini-SD)
A 1.3-megapixel digital camera (camera
version only)
W E L C O M E
7
What’s in the box?
What do I need to
get started?
You should have received all the following
items in the Treo smartphone box:
As you work through the instructions in this
guide, you’ll need all the items that came in
in the box? ), as well as the following:
Hardware
•
•
•
•
•
Treo smartphone
Rechargeable battery
AC charger
•
An activated account with Verizon
Wireless
USB sync cable
Stereo headset
•
A location with wireless coverage for
your smartphone
•
•
An electrical outlet
Documentation and software
The computer with which you want to
synchronize your personal information
•
•
•
Read This First setup poster
Quick Reference
•
The Palm Software Installation CD
included in the box
Palm Software Installation CD, which
includes the following:
• Palm® Desktop software
• Links to bonus software for your
smartphone
• User Guide (this guide)
Palm warranty
•
•
Software license agreement
W E L C O M E
8
tips are available by selecting a Tips
in the upper-right corner of a dialog box.
icon
Where to learn more
Online support from Palm: For up-to-date
downloads, troubleshooting, and support
information, go to
For a quick introduction
Quick Tour: Introduces you to many of your
smartphone’s features. You can open it
any time. Press Applications
select Quick Tour
, and then
.
If you need more information
Windows Vista™ users: For information on
using your smartphone and desktop software
with Windows Vista, visit www.palm.com/
Interactive User Guide: Walks you through
how to move around on your smartphone, set
up features (such as voicemail and email), and
perform common tasks. To view this guide,
®
Books: Many books on Palm OS devices are
available in local or online book retailers (look
in the computers section), or visit
While using your Treo™ smartphone
On-device User Guide: A specially formatted
version of this guide, available right on your
smartphone. To open the on-device guide,
Online forums: Consult online Treo device
user discussion groups to swap information
and learn about topics you may find nowhere
else. For details, visit www.palm.com/
press Applications
, select My Treo
, select the Support tab, and then select
User Guide
.
Customer service from Verizon Wireless: For
questions about your mobile account or
features, contact Verizon Wireless technical
support at 800-922-0204 or Verizon Wireless
customer service and billing at 800-256-4646.
Tips: Many of the built-in applications include
tips for getting the most out of your
smartphone. Some tips are available from a
menu: open an application, press Menu
,
select Options, and then select Tips. Other
W E L C O M E
9
W E L C O M E
10
CHAPTER
1
Setting up
You’re about to discover the many things about your
Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone that will help you better
manage your life and have fun, too.
As you become more familiar with your smartphone, you’ll
want to personalize the settings and add applications to make it
uniquely yours. But first, take these few easy steps to set up.
Benefits
•
Know where your smartphone
controls are located
•
Establish a link between your
smartphone and your computer
•
Start using your smartphone right
away
11
In this chapter
S E T T I N G U P
1
Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone overview
Front view
Indicator light (phone
and charge indicator)
Earpiece
5-way navigator and
Center button
Power/End
Applications
Menu
Volume button
Side button
Send
Wireless Sync
Calendar
Phone
Option
TIP Protect your screen. Be careful to store
your smartphone away from items that might
scratch or crush the screen. Visit
www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon to find
carrying cases and other useful accessories.
DID YOU KNOW? The indicator light is visible
only when the light is on.
DID YOU KNOW? When your smartphone screen
is on, you can press and hold the Side button
to open an application of your choice; see
Reassigning buttons for details.
P A L M ® T R E O ™ 7 5 5 P S M A R T P H O N E O V E R V I E W
13
S E T T I N G U P
1
Back view
Self-portrait
Speaker
Camera lens
(camera
version only)
mirror (camera
version only)
Stylus
Battery door release
Infrared
(IR) port
Mini-expansion
card slot
Headset jack
Multi-connector
Microphone
IMPORTANT The Treo smartphone
speaker includes a large magnet, so be
sure to keep your smartphone away from
credit cards or other items that could be
demagnetized.
P A L M ® T R E O ™ 7 5 5 P S M A R T P H O N E O V E R V I E W
14
S E T T I N G U P
1
Top view
Installing the battery
Sound On
Sound Off
1
Press the battery door release, and
slide the battery door downward to
remove it from your smartphone.
Ringer switch
DID YOU KNOW? The Ringer switch silences all
sounds, including music, at once; you don’t
need to hunt for “off” or “mute” settings in
individual applications.
Battery door
release
2
3
Align the metal contacts on the battery
with the contacts inside the battery
compartment.
Insert the battery into the compartment
at a 45-degree angle, and then press it
into place.
I N S T A L L I N G T H E B A T T E R Y
15
S E T T I N G U P
1
Battery
TIP If your smartphone does not turn on, you
need to connect it to the AC charger. If it still
does not turn on after you connect the AC
charger, then do a soft reset. See Performing
contacts
Smartphone
contacts
Charging the battery
The battery comes with a sufficient charge
to complete the setup process and activate
your phone. After activation, we
recommend charging your smartphone for
3.5 hours (or until the indicator light is solid
green) to give it a full charge. See
Maximizing battery life for tips on
maximizing the life of your smartphone’s
battery.
4
5
Slide the battery door onto the back of
the smartphone until it clicks into place.
When the language selection screen
appears, select the language you want
to use.
IMPORTANT You must select the same
language on your smartphone and desktop
software.
TIP To avoid draining the battery, charge your
smartphone every day, especially if you use
your phone often.
6
Follow the onscreen instructions to set
up your smartphone.
DID YOU KNOW? If your battery ever becomes
fully drained, your info is still stored safely on
your smartphone until you recharge the
battery or connect your smartphone to a
power source.
C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y
16
S E T T I N G U P
1
1
2
Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
3
To confirm that your smartphone is
charging, check the indicator light on
your smartphone.
Connect the charger cable to the
bottom of the smartphone. Make sure
the arrow on the connector is facing up,
toward the screen.
• Solid red indicates that your
smartphone is charging.
• Solid green indicates that your
smartphone is fully charged.
Indicator light
TIP If the battery is fully drained, it may take a
few moments for the indicator light to turn on
when you begin charging.
DID YOU KNOW? You can also charge your
smartphone by connecting it to your computer
with the sync cable. You can do this with or
without using the charger cable (see
computer).
TIP If the indicator light doesn’t turn on when
you connect your smartphone to the AC
charger, double-check the cable connection
and the electrical outlet to which it is
connected.
Keep in mind that it takes longer to charge the
battery using the sync cable, and if your laptop
isn’t plugged into a power source, it can drain
the laptop’s battery.
C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y
17
S E T T I N G U P
1
your phone on and off), the onscreen
battery icon displays the charging status:
Battery icon
A red lightning bolt indicates that
the battery is connected to a wall
outlet and is charging.
A green lightning bolt indicates
that the battery is connected to a
wall outlet and is fully charged.
A partial battery without a
Maximizing battery
lightning bolt indicates that the
battery is not connected to a wall
outlet and it has some power.
life
An almost empty battery that is
red at the bottom indicates that
you need to charge the battery
immediately.
Battery life depends on how you use your
smartphone. You can maximize the life of
your battery by following a few easy
guidelines:
DID YOU KNOW? You can buy an extra battery as
a spare for long airplane trips or periods of
heavy use. To purchase batteries that are
compatible with your smartphone, go to
www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon.
TIP To see exactly how much power is left in
your battery, tap the onscreen battery icon.
M A X I M I Z I N G B A T T E R Y L I F E
18
S E T T I N G U P
1
•
•
Charge your smartphone whenever
you’re at your desk, or charge it
overnight. The Li-ion battery has a much
longer useful life when it is topped off
frequently, versus charging it after it is
fully drained.
•
•
Turn down the screen brightness (see
Decrease the settings in Power
Preferences and turn off Beam Receive
®
•
Turn off the Bluetooth feature if you’re
Your smartphone’s wireless features
(phone, email, messaging, and web)
and media features (camera, media
players, eBooks, and games) consume
more power than its organizer features.
If you spend a lot of time using the
wireless and media features, keep an
eye on the battery icon and charge
when necessary.
not using it. See Connecting to a
Making your first call
BEFORE YOU BEGIN If Phone Off
appears in the title bar, you need to turn on
you are outside a wireless coverage area. If
you believe you are in a wireless coverage
area and this problem persists, contact
Verizon Wireless for assistance:
•
•
If you don’t plan to use the wireless
features on your smartphone for a
your phone on and off) and let all calls
be picked up by voicemail.
As with any mobile phone, if you are in
an area with no wireless coverage, your
smartphone searches for a signal, which
consumes power. If you cannot move to
an area of better coverage, temporarily
turn off your phone. While your phone is
off, you can continue to use your
•
Verizon Wireless technical support:
800-922-0204
•
Verizon Wireless customer service and
billing: 800-256-4646
smartphone’s nonwireless features.
M A K I N G Y O U R F I R S T C A L L
19
S E T T I N G U P
1
1
2
Press Phone
.
If prompted, press Center
to turn
off Keyguard (see Locking your keyboard
(Keyguard) for more info).
3
If you haven’t already activated your phone,
follow these steps before continuing:
•
Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter *228
.
• Press Send to dial.
• When prompted, press 1 (this number
appears on the E letter key) to
program your phone. A service
provisioning message appears on
your smartphone screen.
5
6
Press Send
After you finish the call, press Power/
End to end the call.
to dial.
TIP You can also dial phone numbers with the
number pad on the keyboard. See Dialing
using the keyboard for details.
• Wait a few minutes until you see the
Programming Successful! message,
and then tap the onscreen OK button.
If the Ringer switch is set to Sound
Adjusting call volume
On
programming is successful.
Press Power/End to end the call.
, you hear three tones when
While a call is in progress, press the
Volume button on the side of your
smartphone to adjust the call volume.
•
4
Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the
number you want to call.
•
To increase the volume, press the upper
half of the Volume button.
•
To decrease the volume, press the
lower half of the Volume button.
M A K I N G Y O U R F I R S T C A L L
20
S E T T I N G U P
1
TIP If your phone number doesn’t appear in
Phone Info, turn your phone off and on again
before you recheck Phone Info. If your phone
number still doesn’t appear, contact Verizon
Wireless to confirm that your phone has been
activated.
Volume button
Setting up your
computer
What’s my phone number?
You need to install the desktop software
and connect the sync cable so that you can
synchronize the info on your computer and
the info on your smartphone. You can use
either Palm® Desktop software (included)
or Microsoft Outlook® for Windows (sold
separately) as your desktop software.
1
Make sure your phone is on (see
2
3
4
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Phone
Info.
Synchronization means you can enter or
change info on your smartphone or on your
computer and then sync to automatically
update the info in both places. There’s no
need to enter the info twice. We strongly
recommend that you sync your
Look here for
your phone
number
smartphone with your computer frequently
to keep your info up-to-date (and backed
up) in both locations.
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R
21
S E T T I N G U P
1
System requirements
using your smartphone and desktop
software with Windows Vista.
Your computer should meet the following
minimum system profiles:
Upgrading from another Palm OS® device
•
Windows 2000, XP Service Pack 2, or
Media Center Edition 2005
NOTE If you are setting up your first Palm
OS device, skip ahead to Connecting your
• 32MB of available memory (RAM)
• 170MB of free hard disk space
• CD drive
You can transfer all compatible applications
and information from your previous Palm
OS® device to your new Treo 755P
smartphone. This includes your calendar
events, contacts, memos, and tasks, as
well as your application settings and any
compatible third-party applications
and files.
• Available USB port
•
Mac OS X version 10.2 or later
• 128MB of total memory (RAM)
• 190MB of free hard disk space
• CD drive
• Available USB port
When you install the desktop software
from the Palm Software Installation CD,
some third-party applications may be
quarantined because they are not
compatible with the Palm OS software
version 5.4.9 on your new Treo
smartphone. Quarantined files are not
installed on your smartphone, nor are they
deleted; these files are placed in a new
folder on your computer: C:\Program
Files\Palm\device name\PalmOS5
Windows XP users: To sync your info, you
must install Palm Desktop software from
the Palm Software Installation CD that
came with your smartphone—even if you
sync with Outlook (sold separately) or
another third-party application.
Windows Vista users: Before inserting
the Palm Software Installation CD, go to
www.palm.com/windowsvista where you’ll
find instructions and information about
Incompatible Apps. (On some systems
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R
22
S E T T I N G U P
1
Palm may be replaced with palmOne or
Handspring.)
• Look at the numbers on the Free
Space line and subtract the number
on the left from the number on the
right to calculate the space used. For
example, on the device shown here,
22.4 – 17.5 = 4.9. This means that
4.9MB of space is occupied on this
device.
TIP If you have third-party applications on the
device you are upgrading from, you may want
of apps you do not want to try to install on
useful if you run into other problems during
the upgrade process.
TIP Some third-party utilities allow you to back
up your old device’s information onto an
expansion card and then transfer the info to
your Treo 755P smartphone. We do not
recommend this method because any
incompatible applications are also transferred
to your smartphone.
2
If the space occupied on your previous
device is 60MB or less, then go to step
3. If the space occupied is greater than
60MB, then do any of the following to
reduce the storage space you’re using
before you go to the next step:
1
Calculate how much space your apps
and info occupy on your previous Palm
OS device:
• From Applications View, open the
menus.
• Delete any third-party applications
that you no longer use.
• Select Info on the App menu.
• Move large files, such as eBooks and
images, to an expansion card.
• At the bottom of the screen, select
Size.
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R
23
S E T T I N G U P
1
• Move third-party applications to an
expansion card.
• Indicate whether you want to sync
only the info in your PIM apps
(Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and
Tasks) or all info and apps (excluding
apps known to be incompatible).
• Purge old info in applications such as
Calendar (Date Book), Tasks (To Do),
and email. Refer to the
documentation that came with your
previous device for instructions on
these items.
• Select a device name for your new
smartphone; be sure to select the
same name that you used for your old
device. (This is the name that appears
in the User list in Palm Desktop
software.)
3
4
Synchronize your previous device with
your previous desktop software to back
up your information one last time.
MAC ONLY If you have pictures on your
previous device, copy them from your
previous device to an expansion card or
beam them to your new Treo 755P
smartphone.
Install the desktop synchronization
software from your new Palm Software
Installation CD (see Installing the
IMPORTANT Do not synchronize your new
Treo 755P smartphone with any previous
versions of Palm Desktop software.
6
If you plan to continue using your
previous device, perform a hard reset to
remove its associated device name.
(See the documentation that came with
your previous device for instructions on
performing a hard reset.) Each device
you synchronize with your computer
must have a unique name. The next
time you synchronize your previous
device with your computer, be sure to
assign it a new name.
5
During the installation process, sync
your new Treo smartphone with your
new desktop software as instructed.
When prompted, do the following:
• Connect your new smartphone to
your computer (see Connecting your
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R
24
S E T T I N G U P
1
If any third-party applications are
quarantined during the installation, do not
manually install them. Contact the
third-party developer for software updates
and info about compatibility with your Treo
755P smartphone.
1
2
Close any apps that are running on your
computer, including those that are
minimized. Your computer needs all its
resources to install the software.
Insert the Palm Software Installation CD
into the CD drive on your computer.
Installing the desktop synchronization
software
IMPORTANT Even if you already own a
Palm OS device and have installed a
previous version of the desktop software,
you must install the software from the
Palm Software Installation CD that came
with your Treo 755P smartphone.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you are installing
on a computer at work, make sure your
computer is configured to let you install
new software. Contact your company’s
IT department for help.
3
4
If you are installing on a Mac,
double-click the CD icon on the desktop,
and then double-click the
PalmSoftware.pkg icon.
When the installation wizard opens,
follow the onscreen instructions. Please
note these important points about the
installation process:
TIP If you want to sync info with applications
other than Palm Desktop or Microsoft
Outlook, you need to purchase additional
third-party sync software. This sync software
is sometimes called a conduit.
• When the language selection screen
appears, click the same language you
selected on your smartphone.
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R
25
S E T T I N G U P
1
• You can choose which desktop
2
Plug the USB sync cable into an
available USB port or a powered USB
hub on your computer.
software you want to use for
synchronization: Palm Desktop
software or Microsoft Outlook.
TIP For best performance, plug your sync
cable directly into a USB port on your
computer. If your computer has USB ports on
both the front and back, we suggest using the
back port; the front port is often a low-power
port. If you use a USB hub, make sure the
hub has its own power supply.
TIP To download a trial version of Microsoft
Outlook and learn about discount offers go to:
NOTE If you use Microsoft Outlook as your
desktop email application, select Microsoft
Outlook as your desktop synchronization
software. If you select Microsoft Outlook,
Palm Desktop software still installs on your
computer. When you enter information on
your computer, be sure to enter your
information in Microsoft Outlook, not in
Palm Desktop software.
3
4
With the sync button facing up, connect
the sync cable to the bottom of your
smartphone. Do not press the sync
button until you are instructed to do so.
Connect the charger cable to the
bottom of your smartphone.
•
When the install process prompts you
to connect your smartphone to your
Sync
button
Sync
cable
Connecting your Treo smartphone to your
computer
1
Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R
26
S E T T I N G U P
1
You are now ready to synchronize; go to
corporate server frequently to keep your
info up-to-date (and backed up) in
both locations.
The info from all the following applications
is updated by default each time you sync
your smartphone with your desktop
software:
Synchronizing
information—the
basics
Synchronizing means that info that is
entered or updated in one place
(your smartphone or your computer) is
automatically updated in the other, so
there’s no need to enter the info twice. We
strongly recommend that you sync your
smartphone with your computer or
How each application syncs depends on
your computer type and the desktop
software you are using, as follows:
Computer type
Desktop type
What syncs and where
Windows
Microsoft Outlook
(sold separately)
•
Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and Tasks
sync with Outlook
•
Pics&Videos syncs with Palm Desktop
software
Windows
Mac
Palm Desktop
software
All apps sync with Palm Desktop software
Palm Desktop
software
All apps sync with Palm Desktop software
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — T H E B A S I C S
27
S E T T I N G U P
1
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To sync your info,
3
4
A message indicates that
synchronization is in progress.
you must install Palm Desktop software
from the Palm Software Installation CD
that came with your Treo 755P
smartphone—even if you sync with
Outlook (sold separately) or another
third-party application. See Installing the
instructions.
Wait for a message that indicates that
the process is complete before you
disconnect the sync cable.
TIP If you have problems synchronizing, see
Synchronization for suggestions.
TIP For more sync options, including which
apps sync, see Synchronizing information—
1
Connect your Treo 755P smartphone to
your computer (see Connecting your
If you’re finishing your initial setup, you
now have the option to install bonus
software. If you choose to install some of
the bonus software, you need to sync
again to install the software on your
smartphone. You can also install bonus
NOTE If you’re performing initial setup,
your smartphone should already be
connected to your computer.
2
Press the sync button on the sync
cable.
TIP For info on locating your pictures and
videos on your computer, see Viewing
Sync button
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — T H E B A S I C S
28
CHAPTER
2
Moving around on your
smartphone
Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you
figured out that the numbered streets run north/south and the
avenues run east/west? Learning to move around on your
smartphone is similar. Most Palm OS® applications use the
same set of controls. So once you learn how to use these
controls on your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone, you’ll be
driving all over town and you won’t even need a map.
Benefits
•
•
•
Find and open applications quickly
Access extra features with menus
•
Access many more characters and
symbols than are displayed on the
keyboard
Move around in applications with
one hand, using the 5-way
navigator
29
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E
2
Moving around the
screen
TIP Some third-party applications may not
work with the 5-way navigator, and you must
use the stylus instead.
DID YOU KNOW? In this guide, we use arrow
icons to indicate directions on the 5-way.
These are different from any onscreen arrows
that you tap with your stylus or select with
the 5-way to display pick lists.
To move around the Treo 755P smartphone
screen, you can use the 5-way navigator for
one-handed navigation, or you can tap
items on the screen with the stylus. With
use, you will find your own favorite way to
scroll, highlight, and select menu items.
The 5-way includes the following buttons:
Center
Up
Left
Right
Down
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N
31
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E
2
Scrolling through screens
Up
or Down to scroll one screen
at a time.
As on a computer, you scroll on the Treo
smartphone to move from field to field or
You can also scroll using the stylus. Tap an
page to page, or in some cases to highlight onscreen scroll arrow, or drag the slider of
an item or option in a list.
an onscreen scroll bar.
In list screens, use the 5-way
to
select and move between entries such as
notes, memos, contacts, or photos. In
individual entry screens—such as a single
photo or email message—use the 5-way to
move among the items on the screen or to
move to another entry.
Slider
Scroll arrows
The behavior of the 5-way for list screens
and entry screens varies according to
application. Here are some general
scrolling tips that apply in most
applications:
Highlighting and selecting items
On most screens, one item—a button, a
list entry, or a check box—is highlighted by
default. The highlight identifies which item
is affected by your next action. Use the
5-way to move the highlight from one item
to another before opening or selecting it.
•
Press Right , Left , Up , or
Down to move to the next field,
button, or action in that direction.
The highlight can take one of two forms,
depending on what is highlighted:
•
•
In list screens, press and hold Up
Down to scroll one screen at a time.
or
•
Border glow: When an onscreen
When inside a text field, press Right
button (such as OK or Cancel) or pick list
is highlighted, the item displays a glow
around its border. If an entire list screen
or Left to scroll to the next character
or word, press Up
or Down to
scroll between lines, or press and hold
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N
32
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E
2
is highlighted, the glow appears at the
top and bottom of the screen only.
TIP When a border appears at the top and
bottom of a list screen, press Center on the
5-way to highlight the first item in the list.
TIP After you open an application (see
Opening applications), experiment with using
the 5-way to highlight various screen
elements.
Highlighting text
You can use the stylus to highlight text on
the screen.
•
Tap and drag the stylus across the text
you want to highlight.
•
•
To highlight a word, double-tap it.
To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it.
•
Colored background: When a phone
number, text, an email address, a web
link, or an item in a list is highlighted,
the item is displayed as white text
against a colored background. Examples
of lists include the Contacts list, the
Messaging Inbox, and the Tasks list.
Accessing command buttons
In most applications, command buttons
such as New, OK, and Details appear at the
bottom of the screen. In many cases, you
can jump directly to these buttons instead
of scrolling to them.
•
From a list screen, such as the Contacts
list or Memos list, press Right to
jump to the first button.
After highlighting an item, you can select or
activate it by pressing Center
, or by
tapping the item with the stylus.
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N
33
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E
2
•
•
From a screen where you create or edit
entries, such as Edit Contacts, press
Center
to jump to the first button.
From a dialog box, such as Edit
Categories, press Up
or Down to
scroll to the buttons.
KEY TERM Dialog box A set of options and
command buttons that are enclosed by a
border and that enable you to carry out a
specific task.
Menu shortcut
2
3
4
Press Right and Left to switch
between menus.
Selecting menu items
Many applications have menus to give you
access to additional features. These menus
are usually hidden from view, but they
Press Up
and Down to highlight a
menu item.
Press Center
to select the menu
appear when you press Menu
. To get
item, or press Menu
to close the
the most out of your Treo smartphone, it’s
a good idea to familiarize yourself with the
additional features available through the
various application menus.
menu and cancel your selection.
TIP Most menu items have menu shortcuts
listed in the menu. To use a menu shortcut,
press Menu plus the shortcut letter. You don’t
have to see the menu item to use the menu
shortcut. For example, when you’re in
Calendar, you can press Menu + N to create a
new event.
1
Press Menu
to display an
application’s menus.
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N
34
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E
2
Selecting options in a pick list
•
Stylus: Use your stylus to tap the pick
list.
A range of options is often presented in a
type of menu called a pick list, which can
be identified by a downward-pointing
arrow. Pick lists are different from the
application menus previously described.
The application menus give you access to
additional features and pick lists let you
select the contents for a particular field.
• Tap the item you want from the list.
• To exit the pick list without making a
selection, tap outside the list.
You can select items from a pick list with
the 5-way or the stylus.
•
5-way: Use the 5-way
to highlight
the pick list, and then press Center
to display the items in the list.
• Press Up
and Down to highlight
the item you want.
• Press Center
to select the
highlighted item.
• To exit the pick list without making a
selection, press Left or Right
.
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N
35
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E
2
Using the keyboard
Backlight
Backspace
Return
Option
Shift/Find
Menu
Space
Alt
Entering lowercase and uppercase letters
TIP When using the keyboard, most people
find it easiest to hold the Treo smartphone
with two hands and use the tips of both
thumbs to press the keys.
•
•
To enter lowercase letters, press the
desired keys.
To enter an uppercase letter, press
Shift/Find
key. You don’t need to press and hold
Shift while entering a letter. When Shift
is active, the
lower-right corner of the screen.
and then press a letter
DID YOU KNOW? The Treo smartphone includes
a keyboard backlight that turns on and off
when the screen turns on or off. The backlight
also dims when an active call lasts longer than
a specified period of time. See Optimizing
power settings to adjust the automatic
shut-off and dimming intervals.
symbol appears in the
U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D
36
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E
2
•
To turn Caps Lock on, press Shift/Find
DID YOU KNOW? Some application views
automatically default to Option Lock, such as
the Dial Pad View in the Phone application or
the Calculator. In this case, you do not need
to press Option to enter numbers.
twice. To turn it off, press Shift/
Find
once. When Caps Lock is on,
symbol appears in the
the
lower-right corner of the screen.
Entering numbers, punctuation, and
symbols
Entering other symbols and accented
characters
Number, punctuation, and symbol
characters appear above the letters on
the keys.To enter these characters, do one
of the following:
Symbols and accented characters that do
not appear on the keyboard are sometimes
called alternate characters because they
are entered using the Alt
key.
1
Enter the character that corresponds to
the symbol or accented character you
want. See the table on the next page.
Symbol
Letter
2
3
Press Alt
.
•
Press Option
, and then press the
key with the desired character shown
above the letter. You don’t need to press
and hold Option while pressing the
second key. When Option is active, the
symbol appears in the lower-right
corner of the screen.
Press Up , Down , Right , or
Left to highlight the desired
character.
4
Press Center
character.
to insert the
•
To turn Option Lock on, press Option
twice. To turn it off, press Option
once. When Option Lock is on, the
DID YOU KNOW? Alternate characters are
grouped by their similarity to the base key. For
example, the alternate characters for the e key
are é, è, ë, ê, and
.
symbol
appears in the lower-right
corner of the screen.
U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D
37
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E
2
Symbols and accented characters
Press…
Then press
Alt to
Press…
Then press
Alt to
Press…
Then press
Alt to
select…
á à ä â ã å æ
Á À Ä Â Ã Å Æ
ß
select…
select…
ú ù ü û
Ú Ù Ü Û
x ¤
a
n
ñ
u
A
N
Ñ
U
b or B
o
ó ò ö ô œ õ
x or X
c
ç ¢ ©
O
Ó Ò Ö Ô Œ Õ
y
Y
!
ý ÿ
C
Ç ¢ ©
p or P
r or R
s
¶
Ý Ÿ
e
é è ë ê
É È Ë Ê
í ì ï î
®
¡
E
ß š
ß Š
™
?
:
¿
i
S
:-) :-( ;-)
£ ¥ ¢
I
Í Ì Ï Î
t or T
$
l or L
£
Press Alt
characters:
by itself, after a space or at the beginning or end of a line, to select these
£ ¥ ¢ [ ] { } < > « » © ® ™ ~ ^ ø |
; _ • \ % = ° ÷
U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D
38
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E
2
Each quick button opens two applications:
Opening applications
•
To open a button’s primary application,
simply press the button.
When you open an application using either
Applications View or an application button,
you automatically close the application you
were previously using.
Button
Primary application
Phone
Calendar
Using the quick buttons
The front of the Treo 755P smartphone has
three buttons that you can use to open
applications. The fourth button opens
Applications View (see Using Applications
View).
Wireless Sync
•
To access a button’s secondary
application, press Option
and then
press the quick button.
TIP You can customize the quick buttons
Buttons
Secondary application
Web
+
+
+
World Clock
Messaging
Phone
DID YOU KNOW? Pressing Option + Menu dims
your smartphone screen.
Option
Calendar
Applications
Wireless
Sync
O P E N I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S
39
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E
2
Using Applications View
In Applications View, you can also do any of
the following:
You can access all available applications
through Applications View.
•
Press Applications
repeatedly to
cycle through various categories of
applications. See Applications settings
for more info on categories.
1
2
Press Applications
.
Use the 5-way
application you want to use.
to highlight the
•
Enter the first few letters of the
application’s name to highlight it. For
example, if you enter P, it highlights
Phone; if you then enter R, it highlights
Prefs. If you pause and then enter R, it
highlights the first application that starts
with R.
TIP You can also press and hold Applications
from any screen on your smartphone to select
from a list of your most recently used apps.
3
Press Center
to open the selected
application.
O P E N I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S
40
CHAPTER
3
Your phone
The Phone application is your home base for making and
receiving calls and for storing info about the people you need to
stay in touch with.
You can effectively manage multiple calls, such as sending text
messages to ignored calls, swapping between calls, and
creating three-way conference calls. Your Palm® Treo™ 755P
smartphone helps you perform all these tasks with ease.
And you can do more than manage your phone calls, too. You
can send text messages, open applications, go to your favorite
web pages, see your upcoming appointments, and even find
out how many unread email messages you have.
Benefits
•
Stay in touch: you choose how
•
Have fun: add wallpaper and
ringtones
•
Save time with shortcuts to your
favorite info
41
Y O U R P H O N E
3
example, when you’re on a plane and want
to look at your calendar.
Turning your
smartphone on and
off
1
Press and release Power/End
to wake up the screen.
TIP You can also press any of the quick
buttons or the Applications button to wake
up your smartphone screen.
NOTE Throughout this guide we use the
term smartphone to describe your device
and its physical attributes. We use the term
phone to describe the features of your
smartphone that lets you connect to the
Verizon Wireless network to make and
receive calls and transmit data.
Power/End
Center
The phone and the screen of your
smartphone can be turned on and off
separately. This means that you can wake
up the screen to use just the organizer
features of your smartphone, without
turning on the phone. Also, when the
screen is turned off, the phone can be on
and ready for you to receive and make
calls.
2
3
Press Center
to turn off Keyguard.
For more info about turning Keyguard on
and off, see Locking your keyboard
Press and release Power/End
to turn off the screen.
Waking up the screen
TIP You can set how long the screen stays on.
Press Applications, select Preferences,
select Power, and then adjust the Auto-off
after setting.
Wake up the screen and leave the phone
turned off when you want to use only the
organizer features of your smartphone; for
T U R N I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E O N A N D O F F
43
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Turning your phone on and off
When your smartphone locates a signal
(provided you are in a coverage area),
Verizon Wireless and the
When your phone is on, it is connected to
the Verizon Wireless network (provided
you are in a coverage area) so that you can
make and receive phone calls and use
wireless services such as email,
messaging, and the web browser. During
initial setup, your phone is on by default, so
you can use wireless services right away.
signal-strength
icon appear at the
top of the screen, indicating that you
can use the phone and Internet features
(if supported by the mobile network).
TIP The indicator light flashes green when
your phone is on and you’re inside a coverage
area. If you’re outside a coverage area, No
Service appears in the upper-left corner and
the indicator light flashes amber.
If you turn off your phone, you can still use
the organizer features such as Contacts
and Calendar, as well as the media
features, such as the pTunes music
application and Pics&Videos. This is
sometimes referred to as flight mode and
is ideal for airplane flights and maximizing
battery life.
3
Press and hold Power/End
again to turn off your phone. When your
phone is off, Phone Off and the
phone-off
icon appear at the top of
the Phone application screen and your
smartphone is not connected to any
mobile network. You can still use the
nonwireless features of your
1
2
Wake up the screen.
Press and hold Power/End
turn on your phone.
to
smartphone, such as Contacts,
Calendar, Tasks, and Memos.
TIP If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On,
you hear a series of tones when you turn your
T U R N I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E O N A N D O F F
44
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Opening the Phone application
Press Phone to open the Phone
application’s Main View.
•
Status icons
Dial Pad
3
Tap Dial or press Send
the call.
to make
Favorite
buttons
TIP If you changed the wallpaper in the Phone
access the Dial Pad. From the Phone
application’s Main View, press Send, and then
select Dial Pad.
Making calls
Your smartphone offers several options for
making calls. As you become familiar with
your smartphone, you’ll discover which
method you prefer.
DID YOU KNOW? You can paste numbers directly
into the Dial Pad. Copy a number from another
application and press Phone to switch to the
Dial Pad. Open the Edit menu and select
Paste. Press Send to dial.
Dialing using the onscreen Dial Pad
1
2
Press Phone
.
Dialing using the keyboard
Enter the phone number by tapping the
onscreen Dial Pad with the stylus.
1
2
Press Phone
.
Press the numbered keys to enter the
phone number. (You don’t need to press
Option.)
M A K I N G C A L L S
45
Y O U R P H O N E
3
• First name (JOH for John)
• Last name (SMI for Smith)
• First initial and last name (JSM for
John Smith)
For example, entering SM would display
Smilla Anderson, John Smith, and Sally
Martin. Entering JSM finds only John
Smith.
Text appears
here as you
enter it
3
Press Send
to make the call.
TIP You can also press Center on the 5-way to
make the call.
Dialing by contact name
Before you can dial a call by contact name,
you must create some contacts (see
Adding a contact), or import them by
synchronizing (see Synchronizing
TIP To restart your search, press Backspace to
delete letters you’ve entered. Or select
Cancel to return to Main View.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
4
5
Select the number you want to dial.
Select the Contacts favorite button.
Press Send
to dial.
Using the keyboard, just start entering
one of the following for the contact you
want to call:
M A K I N G C A L L S
46
Y O U R P H O N E
3
DID YOU KNOW? If you want to be able to dial by
entering a contact name in the Phone
application’s Main View (instead of a phone
number), you can change a setting to do that
TIP To see more info for a contact, highlight
the name and press Center
on the 5-way
to view the address, company, and other
details.
DID YOU KNOW? If you select a contact from
Dialing with a speed-dial favorite button
your Contacts list when you create a
speed-dial favorite, you can see all the
numbers for that contact. Highlight that
contact’s speed-dial favorite button, and
press Space on the keyboard.
Your smartphone comes with a few
predefined speed-dial favorite buttons, but
you can also create your own favorites. See
1
2
3
Press Phone
Press Down to access Favorites.
Use the 5-way to highlight the
speed-dial favorite you want.
.
4
Press Center
to make the call.
Dialing from a web page or message
Your smartphone recognizes most phone
numbers that appear on web pages or in
text, email, or multimedia messages.
Look for the
icon to distinguish a
speed-dial favorite from other types of
favorites.
1
Select the phone number on the web
page or in the message.
TIP To view more favorite buttons, repeatedly
press Down or Right on the 5-way to scroll to
other Favorites pages.
M A K I N G C A L L S
47
Y O U R P H O N E
3
call, and then press Send
again to
dial.
2
3
Press Center
Number dialog box.
to open the Dial
Select Dial to dial the number.
To select from a chronological list of
calls: Select the Call Log favorite button.
You can also access your Call Log from the
Phone application’s Main View by pressing
TIP If you can’t use the 5-way or stylus to
highlight and dial a phone number on a web
page or in a message, it means that your
smartphone doesn’t recognize the number as
a phone number.
Send
and selecting Call Log from
the Redial list.
Redialing a recently called number
To dial the last number: From the Phone
application’s Main View, press and hold
Send
to dial the last number you
called.
To select from your most recently dialed
numbers: From the Phone application’s
Main View, press Send
to open the
Redial list, select the number you want to
M A K I N G C A L L S
48
Y O U R P H O N E
3
DID YOU KNOW? If a number in your Contacts
list supports text messaging, you can send a
text message from your Call Log. If a number
in your Call Log matches a number in your
Contacts list, open the Record menu and
select Message to send a message to this
contact.
DID YOU KNOW? If music is playing and a call
arrives, the phone rings softly. The music
pauses automatically if you answer the call
and resumes when you hang up.
Ending a call
Do one of the following:
•
•
•
Press Power/End
.
Select Hang Up All.
Press the button on the headset (if the
headset is attached).
TIP See a photo of the person calling you!
Learn how to assign a caller ID photo in
Receiving calls
To answer a call, do one of the following:
To receive calls, your phone must be on.
This is different from having only the
on and off). When your phone is off, your
calls go to voicemail.
•
•
•
Press Send
.
Select Answer.
Press the headset button (if the
headset is attached).
TIP The headset button may work differently
on headsets other than the one provided with
your smartphone.
R E C E I V I N G C A L L S
49
Y O U R P H O N E
3
To ignore a call, do one of the following:
Send the call to voicemail: Press Power/
End or select Ignore.
Using voicemail
Verizon Wireless service includes
voicemail. Keep in mind that airtime and
other charges apply when using voicemail
from your smartphone.
Send the caller a text message: Select
Ignore with Text. This option sends the
call to voicemail and opens a text message
addressed to the caller.
Setting up voicemail
NOTE Sending text messages to land line
phones may not be supported.
TIP If you can’t connect to the Verizon
Wireless voicemail system, contact Verizon
Wireless for assistance:
To silence the phone while it is ringing, do
one of the following:
•
Verizon Wireless technical support:
800-922-0204.
•
Press any key on your smartphone
•
Verizon Wireless customer service and
billing: 800-256-4646.
except Send, Power/End, or the 5-way.
•
Slide the Ringer switch to Sound
Off
. This immediately silences all
1
Make sure your phone is turned on (see
you are in a coverage area.
system sounds, including the ringer.
DID YOU KNOW? When you silence the ringer
while it is ringing, you can either answer the
call or let it ring through to voicemail.
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press and hold 1 or select the
Voicemail favorite button to dial the
Verizon Wireless automated voicemail
system.
4
Follow the voice prompts to set up your
voicemail.
U S I N G V O I C E M A I L
50
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Voicemail notification
3
Enter your voicemail password using
the keyboard.
When you have a new voicemail message,
you are notified with an Alert dialog box.
TIP Remember, you do not need to press
Option to enter numbers, *, or # while on a
call.
•
To dismiss the Alert dialog box, select
OK.
•
To play the message, select Listen.
NOTE If you defined Extra Digits for the
Voicemail favorite button (see Editing a
favorite button for details), you can select
this button to enter your password.
When you have messages that you have
not listened to, a Voicemail icon also
appears in the title bar of the Phone
application. You can select this icon to
listen to your voicemail.
DID YOU KNOW? tip If the voicemail icon stays in
the title bar after you listen to your messages,
you can clear the voicemail icon. Open the
Options menu, select Phone Preferences,
and then select Clear Voicemail Icon.
Listening to voicemail messages
1
2
Press Phone
.
Press and hold 1 to dial the voicemail
system, or select the Voicemail favorite
button.
U S I N G V O I C E M A I L
51
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Use the 5-way
onscreen buttons. Here’s what the buttons
do:
or stylus to select the
What can I do when
I’m on a call?
Ends the call immediately. You can
also press the headset button (if the
headset is attached).
When you make or receive a call, Active
Call View appears.
Turns on the speakerphone. When
the speakerphone is on, you can
take the smartphone away from
your ear and use other features
during a call. For example, you can
check your calendar or look up
contact info.
Call
duration
Caller’s
name and
number
Turns off the speakerphone when it
is on.
TIP If the screen dims during a call, press any
key except Power/End to restore the screen
brightness. Be careful not to press Power/End
to restore the screen brightness because this
ends the call.
Replaces the Spkr-phone button
when a Bluetooth® headset is
attached. Select this button to
transfer the call from the Bluetooth
headset to the built-in earpiece.
DID YOU KNOW? You can set how long the
screen stays at full brightness during phone
details.
Places the current call on hold.
W H A T C A N
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N
A
C A L L ?
52
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Enables you to place another call
while the first call is on hold. For
information on handling a second
incoming call, see Answering a
Switching applications during a call
You can use many other applications on
your smartphone while holding a phone
conversation, including the organizer and
text messaging features. You cannot,
however, make a data connection while on
a call. This means that you cannot browse
the web or send and receive email or
multimedia messages while on a call.
Opens the Dial Pad so you can
manually dial additional numbers,
such as an extension or a response
to a voice prompt.
Dials any extra digits (such as a
password or an extension) that you
assigned to a favorite button. This
button replaces the Dial Pad button
during outgoing calls to numbers
that include predefined extra digits.
information on defining extra digits.
1
Do one of the following:
• Select Hold to pause your
conversation while you view the other
application.
• Select Spkr-phone to continue the
conversation while you view the other
application.
Mutes the microphone so that you
cannot be heard.
2
3
Press Applications
.
Select the icon for the application you
want to open.
DID YOU KNOW? Do you accidentally press
onscreen buttons when you’re on a call? You
can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive
feature during your calls; see Locking your
4
Press Phone
anytime to return to
Active Call View.
W H A T C A N
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N
A
C A L L ?
53
Y O U R P H O N E
3
the number into the first available phone
number field for that contact.
TIP You can also press Phone to toggle
between Active Call View and Main View in
the Phone app, so you can open a favorite by
selecting its button.
•
•
To decline adding this number, select
Cancel.
To disable the Add New Number
prompt, check the Don’t ask me this
again box.
Saving phone numbers
After you complete an outgoing call to a
number that is not in your Contacts list,
you are prompted to add the number to
your Contacts list. You are also prompted
to add new numbers from incoming calls
with caller ID.
TIP You can turn the Add New Number
prompt on and off. From the Phone
application’s Main View, open the Options
menu, and select Phone Preferences. To turn
this option on, check the Ask to add
unknown phone numbers after calls box.
To turn this option off, uncheck this box.
If you don’t add a number right away, follow
these steps to add it later.
1
In the Call Log (see Redialing a recently
called number), highlight the number
you want to save.
2
3
4
5
Press Menu
.
•
•
To create a new contact entry for this
number, select Create a New Contact,
and enter the contact’s info.
Select Add Contact.
Enter the information for the entry.
Select Done.
To add this number to an existing
contact entry, select Add to a Contact,
and then select the contact. This pastes
W H A T C A N
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N
A
C A L L ?
54
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Making a second call
DID YOU KNOW? When the second call is an
outgoing call, you can conference the two
calls, but you cannot swap between them.
You can make a second call while your first
call is still active.
When the second call is an incoming call, you
can swap between the two calls, but you
cannot conference them.
1
Dial the first number and wait until the
person answers.
2
3
4
Select Hold.
When two calls are active and you press
Power/End, you hang up both calls. If the
second call is an outgoing call, you can return
to the first call by waiting for the person on
the second call to hang up. If you accidentally
hang up both calls, your smartphone
automatically dials the number that was on
hold.
Select Add Call.
Dial the second number using any of
5
When the Dial another call prompt
appears, select Yes .
When two calls are in progress, Active Call
View includes two status lines, each
representing one of the calls.
Answering a second call (call waiting)
When you are on a call, you can receive a
second call. When the second call comes
in, you hear a call waiting tone and the Call
Waiting dialog box appears. You can do any
of the following to handle the second call:
•
To place the current call on hold and
answer the new call, press Send
or select Answer.
•
To send the new call to voicemail, select
Ignore.
W H A T C A N
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N
A
C A L L ?
55
Y O U R P H O N E
3
•
•
To send the new call to voicemail and
send the caller a text message, select
Ignore with Text.
To hang up the current call and answer
the new call, press Power/End
.
When the incoming call message
reappears, select Answer or press
Send
.
After you answer a second call, you can
switch between the original call and the
second call by selecting Swap.
Making a conference call
When you are on a call and place a second
outgoing call, you can join the two calls in a
conference session, provided that the
service is available in your area. Please
contact Verizon Wireless for more
information. Additional charges may apply
and minutes in your mobile account may
be deducted for each call you place.
3
To end the conference, press Power/
End to end all the calls.
DID YOU KNOW? Pressing Send during a
conference call usually hangs up the second
call. However, depending on your network
connection, you may occasionally hang up the
first call.
1
While the first call is in progress, place a
second call.
2
Select Conf. This joins the two calls in a
conference session.
W H A T C A N
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N
A
C A L L ?
56
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Using Flash mode during a call
• If you have one call in progress, to
make an outgoing second call, dial the
number using any of the methods
Flash mode enables you to manually
manage your calls while one or more calls
are active. This mode is often used during a
conference call when one of the calls has
ended but the other remains connected.
• If you have one call in progress and
place an outgoing second call, press
Send
after establishing a
1
Press Send
View.
from Active Call
connection with the second party to
set up a conference session using
three-way calling.
2
If the Do you want to switch to Flash
mode prompt appears, select Yes.
• If you have two calls in conference,
press Send
to hang up one of
the calls; you can then dial another
number and place the new caller into
the conference session.
4
To exit Flash mode and end all the calls,
press Power/End
.
Forwarding calls
Please check with Verizon Wireless about
availability and pricing of forwarding calls to
another phone; call forwarding is not
available in all areas, and additional charges
may apply.
3
While in Flash mode, do any of the
following:
• If you have one call in progress and
answer an incoming second call,
press Send
to swap between
1
2
Press Phone
.
the calls.
Enter *72 followed by the number
where you want to forward your calls.
W H A T C A N
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N
A
C A L L ?
57
Y O U R P H O N E
3
For example, to forward calls to
4
Select Done.
415-555-1234, enter:
*724155551234.
TIP Want to see how much time you spent on
a particular call? From the Call Log, select the
call, and then select Details. Keep in mind
that your billing statement may vary slightly
from the information you see onscreen.
Usage is charged based on your calling plan,
and calling plans vary.
3
4
Press Send
forwarding.
to turn on call
When you’re ready to turn off call
forwarding, enter *73 and then press
Send
.
Defining favorite
buttons
Viewing minutes
usage
Your Treo smartphone provides 70 favorite
buttons for quick access to the following
common tasks:
1
2
Select the Call Log favorite button.
Select Totals.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Dialing a phone number (speed dial)
Accessing your Call Log
Accessing the onscreen Dial Pad
Opening an application
Accessing a web page
Addressing a text, multimedia, or email
message
•
Accessing voicemail (preset on your
Treo smartphone)
3
(Optional) To reset the counters to zero,
select Reset Counters.
V I E W I N G M I N U T E S U S A G E
58
Y O U R P H O N E
3
TIP If there are no blank buttons on the current
Favorites page, press Right on the 5-way to
scroll through the other pages. If all your
favorites are full, you can delete a favorite to
make room for a new one (see Deleting a
3
Enter a label for the favorite:
• If the entry is for an existing contact,
select Lookup. Start entering the last
name of the contact, and select the
contact when it appears in the lookup
list.
DID YOU KNOW? If you’re upgrading from a
previous Treo smartphone, your favorites may
be transferred along with your other info.
However, you may need to rearrange the
order in which your favorites appear by
opening the Record menu and then selecting
Edit Favorites Pages.
• If the entry is for a new contact, enter
the label, press Down , and enter
the number.
DID YOU KNOW? You can assign a special
ringtone for a contact. See Assigning a caller
ID ringtone for details.
Creating a speed-dial favorite button
1
2
Press Phone
.
Use the 5-way to select a blank favorite
button.
4
(Optional) Enter a Quick Key, which you
can press and hold from the Phone
D E F I N I N G F A V O R I T E B U T T O N S
59
Y O U R P H O N E
3
application to instantly dial this
speed-dial number.
5
6
7
Enter a label for the favorite and enter
any other necessary information on the
screen.
5
(Optional) Select More, and then select
advanced options:
(Optional) Enter a Quick Key, which
you can press and hold to open the
favorite from the Phone application.
Extra Digits: Defines additional digits
to dial, such as a password or
extension. To enter a one-second
pause, insert a comma between digits.
To add a longer pause, enter more
commas.
Select OK.
DID YOU KNOW? When creating a Message or
Email favorite, you can enter multiple
addresses; simply separate each address with
a comma. This is an easy way to send
messages to a group of people.
Dial Extra Digits Automatically: Dials
predefined extra digits immediately
after dialing the phone number, when
checked.
Editing a favorite button
6
Select OK.
1
2
Press Phone
.
Use the 5-way
Favorites.
to access
Creating other types of favorite buttons
1
2
Press Phone
.
3
Highlight the favorite button you want to
edit.
Use the 5-way
to access
Favorites.
4
5
Press Menu
.
3
4
Select a blank button.
Select Edit Favorites Button on the
Select the Types pick list and select Call
Log, Dial Pad, Application, Message,
Email, or Web Link.
Record menu.
6
Make the desired changes. For
example, you can add a Quick Key,
which you can press and hold to
D E F I N I N G F A V O R I T E B U T T O N S
60
Y O U R P H O N E
3
instantly open the favorite from the
Phone application.
Using a phone
headset
7
Select OK.
TIP You can also organize your buttons on
various Favorites pages. Open the Record
menu and select Edit Favorites Pages. Drag
and drop the buttons into a new slot. To move
a favorite to another page, drag the button
onto the page icon at the bottom of the
screen.
You can connect a phone headset for
hands-free operation. If you need to use
your phone while driving and this is
permitted in your area, we recommend
using a phone headset (wired stereo
headset included) or a hands-free car kit
(sold separately).
Deleting a favorite button
In addition to the stereo headset included
with your smartphone, your smartphone is
compatible with the following types of
headsets that are sold separately:
1
2
Press Phone
.
Use the 5-way
to access
Favorites.
3
Highlight the favorite button you want to
delete.
•
Wired headsets with a 2.5mm
connector (3-pin or 4-pin)
4
5
Press Menu
.
•
Wireless headsets and car kits enabled
with Bluetooth 1.1 or 1.2 wireless
technology
Select Edit Favorites Button on the
Record menu.
6
7
Select Delete.
TIP The headset designed for Treo 180/270/
300 devices is not compatible with your Treo
755P smartphone.
Select OK.
Check the specifications for your headset
or car kit to confirm compatibility. When in
U S I N G
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T
61
Y O U R P H O N E
3
doubt, ask the manufacturer if the product
•
•
•
Switch between two calls (if the second
call is incoming)
is compatible with Treo 755P smartphones.
To find compatible hands-free devices, go
Join two calls in a conference (if the
second call is outgoing)
NOTE You cannot use a headset with
Bluetooth wireless technology to listen to
music files.
Hang up all calls in progress
TIP The headset button may work differently
on other headsets.
Using a wired headset
Connecting to a Bluetooth® hands-free
device
Microphone
Headset
button
KEY TERM Partnership Two devices—for
example, your smartphone and a hands-free
device—that can connect because each
device finds the same passkey on the other
device. Once you form a partnership with a
device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to
connect with that device again. Partnership is
also known as paired relationship, pairing,
trusted device, and trusted pair.
Speakers
When using the headset that is included
with your smartphone, you can press the
headset button to perform any of the
following tasks:
Once you set up a partnership with a
Bluetooth headset or car kit, you can
communicate with that device whenever it
is turned on and within range. Bluetooth
range is up to 30 feet/10 meters in
•
•
•
Answer an incoming call
Answer a call-waiting call
Pick up a call that is on hold
optimum environmental conditions.
Performance and range may be reduced by
U S I N G
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T
62
Y O U R P H O N E
3
physical obstacles, radio interference from
nearby electronic equipment, and other
factors.
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your smartphone when it is
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to recreate any
partnerships you already created.
TIP If you hear a headset buzz or experience
poor microphone performance, your headset
may be incompatible with your smartphone.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Prepare your
headset or car kit to accept a connection
from another Bluetooth device. See the
documentation that came with your
hands-free device for instructions.
4
5
Keep Visibility set to Hidden, and then
select Setup Devices.
Select Hands-free Setup.
1
Press Applications
and select
Bluetooth or tap the Bluetooth
icon in the title bar.
2
Select Bluetooth On.
6
Follow the onscreen instructions to
create a partnership with the specific
hands-free device. When prompted,
enter a passkey.
IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices
have a predefined passkey; if so, you can
find the passkey in the documentation for
U S I N G
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T
63
Y O U R P H O N E
3
that device. Other devices provide a screen You can tell the connection is successful
where you enter a passkey that you make
up. In either case, you must use the same
when you see a light blue headset icon in
the title bar of the Phone application. You
passkey on both your smartphone and your can now use your smartphone with the
hands-free device. We recommend that
where possible, you make up a passkey of
16 alphanumeric characters (letters and
numerals only) to improve the security of
your smartphone. The longer the passkey,
the more difficult it is for the passkey to be
deciphered.
Bluetooth hands-free device.
Using a Bluetooth hands-free device
After you create a partnership with your
Bluetooth hands-free device and you turn it
on within range (up to 30 feet/10 meters),
your smartphone automatically routes all
calls to the hands-free device instead of to
the earpiece on your smartphone. When a
call comes in, your smartphone rings and
the hands-free device beeps. Even if you
answer the call on your smartphone, the
call goes to the hands-free device. If you
prefer to route calls to the earpiece on your
smartphone, you can change the settings
on your smartphone to do this; see
7
After you finish setting up the device,
select Done to return to Trusted
Devices View.
NOTE For some car kits, you need to
initiate a Bluetooth connection from your
smartphone to complete the partnership
process. To do this, highlight the car kit in
Trusted Devices View, press Menu
,
and then select Connect.
8
(Optional) Enable advanced hands-free
TIP If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free
device and you want to return to the earpiece
during a call, select Cancel Bluetooth in
Active Call View. To return the call to the
hands-free device, open the Options menu
and select Connect Bluetooth.
features by pressing the multifunction
button (MFB) on the hands-free device.
U S I N G
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T
64
Y O U R P H O N E
3
The features of your hands-free device vary Customizing advanced settings for your
by model. Check the documentation for
your hands-free device for details about
these features. Your smartphone can
support the following actions, provided that
your hands-free device also supports them:
hands-free device
You can set whether your hands-free
device automatically answer calls, provided
the device supports this feature.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
and select
•
•
Answer an incoming call
.
Hang up a call and answer a call-waiting
call
2
3
Select Hands-free.
Do one of the following:
•
Place a call on hold and answer a
call-waiting call
To send all calls to your hands-free
device: Check the Always route calls
to handsfree box. Select the Auto
answer pick list and select whether you
want your hands-free device to
•
•
Hang up a single call
Transfer an outgoing call from the
earpiece on your smartphone to the
hands-free device
automatically answer incoming calls and
how quickly it answers.
•
•
Ignore an incoming call
Redial the last number you called from
the hands-free device
To choose between the earpiece on
your smartphone and your
hands-free device on a call-by-call
basis: Uncheck the Always route calls
to handsfree box. When the phone
rings, you can answer the call with your
hands-free device by pressing the
multifunction button on your hands-free
device, or you can answer the call with
the earpiece on your smartphone by
DID YOU KNOW? If you have more than one
Bluetooth hands-free device, the last one you
connected to becomes the active device. To
switch between devices, disconnect the
active device before you try to connect to the
other device.
U S I N G
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T
65
Y O U R P H O N E
3
using the controls on your smartphone
TIP If you select the Show Wallpaper option,
you can still access the Dial Pad. From the
Phone application’s Main View, press Send to
open the Redial list, and then select Dial Pad.
4
Select Done.
DID YOU KNOW? You can also set the
background for the Calendar Agenda View.
calendar for details.
Customizing phone
settings
Customizing the Phone application’s
Main View
Phone Display Options let you customize
the appearance and entry mode of the
Phone application’s Main View.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Phone
Display Options.
Typing: Sets whether typing enters
numbers in the Dial Pad or starts a
contact search.
4
Set any of the following options:
Show…: Sets whether the Dial Pad or
wallpaper appears in the Phone
application’s Main View. If you select
Show Wallpaper, select the thumbnail
image and then select an image to use
as wallpaper.
TIP If you select the Typing starts contacts
search option, you can still enter numbers in
the Dial Pad by pressing Option before
entering the first number.
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S
66
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Show Calendar event: Sets whether
the current event from the Calendar
application appears in the Phone
application’s Main View. When this
option is enabled, you can then select
this event to jump to the Calendar
application.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
4
Select the Application pick list and
select Ring Tones.
Show Favorite buttons: Sets whether
Favorites appear in the Phone
application’s Main View.
Rows: Sets the number of favorite
button rows that appear in the Phone
application’s Main View.
5
Select OK.
5
6
Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
Selecting ringtones
Select the Vibrate pick list and select
how you want your smartphone to
vibrate upon an incoming call.
You can set various tones for various types
of incoming calls.
7
8
(Optional) Check the Escalate ring
tone volume box if you want the ring to
play softly and then increase to full
volume the longer it rings.
DID YOU KNOW? You can download any
compatible ringtone directly to your
smartphone (see Downloading files from a
to your computer and then email them to your
smartphone.
Select ringtones from the following pick
lists:
Known Caller: An incoming call from
someone in your Contacts or Favorites.
1
Press Phone
.
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S
67
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Unknown Caller: An incoming call
• To play a sound, select it with the
5-way
• To delete a sound, highlight it and
press Backspace
from someone identified by caller
ID who is not in your Contacts or
Favorites.
.
.
Roaming: A special tone for incoming
calls when you’re outside your home
mobile network.
• To send a sound, highlight it and
select Send.
6
Select Done twice.
9
Select Done.
TIP You can also create a new sound by
selecting New in Sound & Alerts Preferences.
DID YOU KNOW? You can assign a ringtone to a
contact or an entire category of contacts.
Ringtones assigned to individual contacts
override the ringtone assigned to a category
of contacts.
Selecting Phone alert tones
You can set various tones for various types
of alerts.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Creating and managing ringtones
Press Menu
.
You can also record sounds and use them
as ringtones.
Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
4
Select the Application pick list and
select Phone Alerts.
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
4
5
Select Manage.
Do one of the following:
• To record a sound, select New.
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S
68
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Adjusting call volume
While a call is in progress, press the
Volume button on the side of your
smartphone to adjust the call volume.
5
6
Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
Volume button
Side button
Select the Vibrate pick list and select
how you want your smartphone to
vibrate upon an incoming call.
7
Select alert tones from the following
pick lists:
Adjusting ringer volume
Voicemail Alert: Indicates that a new
When a call is not in progress and music is
not playing, press the Volume button on
the side of your Treo smartphone to adjust
ringer volume, and then press the Side
button to confirm your selection.
voicemail message has arrived.
Coverage in/out: Indicates that you
moved into or out of a coverage area.
Signal faded: Indicates that the signal
lost strength and a call was dropped.
Assigning a caller ID ringtone
8
Select Done.
Caller ID ringtones can let you know who is
calling before you even look at your
smartphone. This is a great way to identify
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S
69
Y O U R P H O N E
3
calls from important people in your life and
to screen calls you’d prefer not to answer.
TIP You can assign a ringtone to an entire
category of contacts. For example, use a
special ringtone for categories such as Family,
Work, or Golf Buddies. Select the category
pick list in the upper-right corner and select
Edit Categories. Select the category, and
then select the ringtone on the Edit Category
screen.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Select the Contacts favorite button.
Open the contact to whom you want to
give a caller ID ringtone.
4
5
Select Edit.
Select the Ringtone pick list and select
Assigning a caller ID photo
a tone for this contact entry.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Select the Contacts favorite button.
Open the contact to whom you want to
give a caller ID photo.
4
Select Edit.
6
Select OK.
5
Select the Picture box and do one of
the following:
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S
70
Y O U R P H O N E
3
• Select Camera to take a photo and
add it to this contact entry when you
save the photo (if your smartphone
includes a camera).
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
Select Options and then select Dial
Preferences.
• Select Photos and select an existing
photo that you want to assign to this
contact.
4
Set any of the following options:
Dialing from North America: Formats
phone numbers using North American
conventions (XXX-XXX-XXXX).
6
Select Done.
DID YOU KNOW? If you assign pictures to your
contacts in Microsoft Outlook® (sold
Always dial 1 in front of the area
code: Adds a 1 in front of 10-digit phone
numbers. This option is available only
when North American Dialing is
enabled.
separately) or Palm® Desktop software and
you install the desktop software from the
Palm Software Installation CD, the pictures
are automatically added to your contact
entries on your smartphone when you sync. If
you use third-party synchronization software,
picture sync may not be supported. Check
with the software vendor for information.
International Prefix: Replaces the +
sign in front of International phone
numbers with the specified number.
To 7 digit numbers: Adds a prefix to
7-digit numbers. For example, enter
your own area code to automatically add
your area code when you dial local
numbers.
Setting your dialing preferences
Dialing preferences let you assign a prefix
to your phone numbers. For example, you
can automatically dial a 1 before all 10-digit
phone numbers. You can add a different
prefix based on the length of the phone
number.
To (6), (5), (4), digit numbers: Adds a
prefix to numbers with the specified
number of digits. For example, if all the
phone numbers in your office begin
with 555, followed by a 4-digit
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S
71
Y O U R P H O N E
3
extension, you can select 4, enter your
area code, and then enter 555 as the
prefix. When you want to call a
colleague, simply enter the colleague’s
4-digit extension. Your smartphone
automatically dials the area code and
555 plus the 4-digit extension. You can
also create contact entries with just the
extension number and then dial the
number from your Contacts list.
5
6
Select one of the following:
5
Select OK.
Location ON: Enables the network to
determine your longitude and latitude
position at any time in order to provide
location-specific services.
Choosing your privacy settings
To maintain privacy, you can encrypt
conversations when you place or receive
calls, provided that this feature is
supported by the network. You can also
choose whether your longitude and latitude
position are available to the network and
third-party applications at all times or only
during an emergency call.
911 Only: Restricts your location
information to emergency services only.
Select OK.
When Voice Privacy is enabled, a voice
privacy icon appears in Active Call View.
The voice privacy icon does not appear
when a call is not in progress or if Voice
Privacy service is not available in your area.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
When Location ON is selected, the
location
appears in Applications View. When 911
Only is selected, the radiating waves
disappear from the location icon.
Select Options, and then select Phone
Preferences.
icon with radiating waves
4
Check the Enable Voice Privacy box
(voice conversations will be encrypted).
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S
72
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Enabling TTY
5
Select OK. A red TTY icon appears in
the title bar of the Phone application
whenever TTY is enabled.
TTY (also known as a TDD or Text
Telephone) is a telecommunications device
that enables you to communicate by
telephone if you are deaf, hard of hearing,
or have speech or language disabilities.
Turning on the HAC Setting
CAUTION Do not turn on the Hearing Aid
Compatibility setting unless you use a
hearing aid with a telecoil. Using this
setting without a hearing aid or with a
hearing aid without a telecoil may be
harmful to your hearing.
Your device is compatible with select TTY
devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD
machine to your device through the
headset jack while this mode is enabled.
Please check with the manufacturer of your
TTY device for connectivity information and
to ensure that the TTY device supports
digital wireless transmission.
When the HAC (Hearing Aid Compatibility)
setting is on, your smartphone sends the
audio from your phone calls to the telecoil
rather than to the microphone of your
hearing aid. You are likely to hear calls
much better because volume is increased
and background noise and feedback are
diminished. The HAC setting improves only
the calls you listen to through the earpiece.
It does not affect calls heard on the
speakerphone or with a car kit or headset.
HAC requires extra battery power, so watch
your battery consumption when it's turned
on.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
Select Options and then select Phone
Preferences.
4
Select the TTY/TDD pick list and select
one of the following settings:
TTY Full: Sends and receives text.
TTY + Talk: Sends voice and receives
text.
TTY + Hear: Sends text and receives
voice.
Off: Sends and receives voice.
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S
73
Y O U R P H O N E
3
1
2
3
Press Phone
Press Menu
.
4
Select a new band, if available.
.
Select Options and then select Phone
Preferences.
4
5
Check the Hearing Aid Compatibility
box.
Select OK.
Manually selecting the wireless band
5
Select OK.
You can use Select Band to search for
service in a different frequency.
What are all those
icons?
IMPORTANT You should only change this
setting if a customer service representative
from Verizon Wireless recommends that
you do so.
You can monitor the status of several items
using icons in the title bar of the Phone
application:
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
Select Options and then select Select
Band.
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?
74
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Your phone is off.
Your phone is on and you are in a
Verizon Wireless coverage area.
If you are outside a coverage
area, No Service, Extended
Network, or Roaming appears
instead. No Service means that
there is no coverage at all and
Roaming means that another
wireless service provider’s
network is available. When
you turn off your phone, Phone
Off appears.
You are in an area that supports
NationalAccess (1xRTT) data
services.
You are in an area that supports
BroadbandAccess (EVDO) data
services.
Your phone is on and connected
to a NationalAccess network, but
you are not actively transmitting
data. You can still make and
answer calls.
You are outside a Verizon
Wireless coverage area and are
roaming on another wireless
service provider’s network. This
icon appears in addition to the
word Roaming. The icon may
flash if the provider is not on the
Verizon Wireless preferred
roaming list.
Your phone is on and connected
to a BroadbandAccess network,
but you are not actively
transmitting data. You can still
make and answer calls.
Your phone is on and a
NationalAccess data connection
is active. You can still make calls,
but you cannot answer calls
(incoming calls go to voicemail).
When you make a call the data
transmission is automatically
interrupted.
Your phone is on. The bars
display the signal strength. The
stronger the signal, the more
bars that appear. If you are
outside a coverage area, no bars
appear.
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?
75
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Your phone is on and a
BroadbandAccess data
Voice Privacy is enabled, you are
in a service area that supports
this feature, and a call is in
progress. When this feature is
active, voice calls are encrypted
for added privacy.
connection is active. You can still
make or answer calls. When you
make or answer a call, the data
transmission is automatically
interrupted, and then it resumes
when you end the call.
The Location setting is on and
your longitude and latitude
position are available to the
network and third-party
applications. When you select
the 911 Only setting, the
radiating waves disappear from
this icon and your location is
available only during emergency
calls.
You have new voicemail
messages. You can select this
icon to retrieve your messages.
You have a new alert, such as a
Calendar alarm or a new text
message. To view the alert,
press and hold Center
select the icon. See Viewing and
or
®
The Bluetooth wireless
technology icon appears in gray
when this feature is off, in blue
when this feature is on, and in
reverse blue when your
smartphone is communicating
with another Bluetooth device.
TTY/TDD Mode is active. Use
this mode to communicate by
telephone if you are deaf or hard
of hearing or if you have speech
or language disabilities.
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?
76
Y O U R P H O N E
3
This icon replaces the Bluetooth
icon when your smartphone is
connected to a Bluetooth
Your battery is fully charged and
your smartphone is not
connected to the charger.
headset or car kit. This icon
appears in dark blue when a call
is in progress and in light blue
when a call is not in progress.
You have new text or multimedia
messages. The numbers next to
the icon indicate the number of
unread messages in your Inbox.
You can select this icon to
This icon replaces the Bluetooth
icon when a dial-up networking
connection using Bluetooth
wireless technology is active.
retrieve your messages.
Displays the current (or next)
event from the Calendar
Your battery is partially drained.
When the battery drains to 20%
of its capacity, the icon changes
from blue to red. At 10% of its
capacity, you begin to receive
warning messages, and at 5% of
its capacity, the smartphone
application. If you have an event
conflict during the current time
period, a red bar appears next to
the event description. To jump to
the current event in the Calendar
application, select the Calendar
status line (see Displaying your
calendar for details).
beeps (if the Ringer switch is set
to Sound On
) and the icon
changes from red to clear.
Your battery is charging. The
lightning bolt turns from red to
green when the battery is fully
charged and your smartphone
remains connected to the
charger.
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?
77
Y O U R P H O N E
3
KEY TERM 1xRTT (Single carrier [1x] radio
transmission technology): A wireless
technology that can provide fast data transfer
and Internet access with average speeds of
60–80Kbps and bursts up to 144Kbps.
KEY TERM EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized): A
wireless broadband technology that is
designed for very high-speed data transfer
with average download speeds of 400–
700Kbps, capable of reaching speeds up
to1.8Mbps, and upload speeds up to 156Kbps.
DID YOU KNOW? You can tap the Bluetooth icon
to quickly turn Bluetooth wireless features on
and off.
TIP To display the remaining battery power, tap
the battery icon at the top of the screen.
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?
78
CHAPTER
4
Your email and other
messages
You already know how efficient email and messaging are for
staying in touch. Now your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone
brings you a new level of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy
the ease and speed of communicating with friends, family, and
colleagues anywhere you can access the Verizon Wireless data
network.
You can send photos to your friends and family, or create
Microsoft® Word or Excel® files and send them to your
colleagues. You can also receive attachments to view and edit
at your convenience.
Benefits
•
Access email on the go
•
Save messages from your
computer to view at a convenient
time
•
Send and receive photos, sound
files, Word and Excel files, and
more
79
In this chapter
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Which application
should I use?
TIP An email application is not an email
provider. It works with an account from a
provider to transfer messages to
your smartphone.
KEY TERM Email provider The service you
use to send and receive email. Your email
provider’s name appears between the @
symbol and the dot symbol in your email
address.
Your smartphone includes two email
applications: the VersaMail® application
(called Email in Applications View), and the
Wireless Sync application. You can also
access web-based email, like Yahoo! Mail
or Hotmail, from the web browser on your
smartphone.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN You must activate
data services on your Verizon Wireless
account before you can use email on your
smartphone.
I want to…
Use this app…
Check free web mail, such as Hotmail, Gmail, or Yahoo! Web browser
Check fee-based Internet mail, such as Yahoo! Mail Plus Wireless Sync or VersaMail
Sync my email and organizer info with my company’s
Exchange server
Wireless Sync or VersaMail
Sync my email with my company’s Domino server
Wireless Sync or VersaMail
VersaMail
Push my email and organizer info from my company’s
Exchange server using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®
Check messages from multiple email addresses
VersaMail
W H I C H A P P L I C A T I O N S H O U L D
I
U S E ?
81
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
I want to…
Use this app…
Sync my email and organizer info with my company’s
Lotus Notes/Domino server
Wireless Sync
Connect to my company’s Wireless Sync server
Wireless Sync
Access email on my smartphone, my computer, and the Wireless Sync
Verizon Wireless website
Use the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) while
sending and receiving messages
Wireless Sync
learn how to send and receive mail, see the
documentation at the following location:
The Wireless Sync
application
How do I get started?
In addition to sending and receiving email
messages, you can also use Wireless Sync
to sync your email and other personal
information when you’re away from your
computer.
1
If you are setting up a personal email
account, or if your corporate email
account does not use a Microsoft
Exchange Server or a Domino server,
gather the following info, and then
follow the steps in Setting up Wireless
The sections that follow cover how to enter
your email account settings in the Wireless
Sync application. To use the Wireless Sync
application, you must subscribe to the
Wireless Sync feature from Verizon
• Wireless Sync password (if you have
one)
• Mobile phone number
Wireless (additional charges may apply).
For more info on Wireless Sync and to
• Email address and password
T H E W I R E L E S S S Y N C A P P L I C A T I O N
82
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
• Incoming mail server name
• Incoming mail server port number
• Mail protocol: POP or IMAP
Setting up Wireless Sync to work with
Internet email
In the Wireless Sync application, all
personal email accounts, such as Earthlink,
AOL, or Yahoo! Mail Plus, are considered
Internet email accounts. In addition, any
corporate email account that does not use
a Microsoft Exchange or Domino server is
referred to as an Internet email account.
2
If your corporate email account uses a
Microsoft Exchange Server or a Domino
server, gather the following info, and
then follow the steps in Setting up
1
2
Press Wireless Sync
.
• Wireless Sync password (if you have
one)
Select Start to download the Wireless
Sync software to your smartphone. (The
download takes a few minutes.)
• Mobile phone number
• Email address and password
3
4
When asked if your company has a sync
server, leave the box unchecked, and
then select Next.
3
If your corporate email account uses a
Wireless Sync server which connects to
a Microsoft Exchange Server or a
Domino server, gather the following
info, and then follow the steps in Setting
Select Ye s , No, or Forgot to indicate
whether you have a Wireless Sync
password. If you select No, your
smartphone’s web browser opens and
you are taken through a series of steps
to create an account. If you select
Forgot, Verizon Wireless sends a
temporary password to your
• The URL for the Wireless Sync server
• Your corporate login and password
smartphone.
DID YOU KNOW? Depending on your service
agreement and rate plan, data fees may apply
when downloading the Wireless Sync
software.
5
Set the following Account Setup info,
and then select Next:
T H E W I R E L E S S S Y N C A P P L I C A T I O N
83
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Mobile number: Enter your
smartphone’s phone number, if it is not
already filled in.
8
Set the following Email Setup info, and
then select Next:
Set up Internet email: Select this
setting to set up Wireless Sync to work
with your existing Internet email
account.
Password: Enter the password for your
Wireless Sync account.
Read Terms & Conditions: Select this
button to read about your Wireless Sync
account.
Email Address: Enter the email address
you want Wireless Sync to access.
Password: Enter the password you use
to access this email address.
I agree to the terms & conditions:
Check the box to indicate that you agree
to the terms and conditions. You cannot
continue unless you check this box.
9
If Wireless Sync recognizes your mail
settings, the first sync begins and you
are done with the setup process.
NOTE You are prompted to scribble on the
screen to create a random number for
encryption.
If Wireless Sync does not recognize
your mail settings, enter the following
information, and then select Next:
6
Set the following Account Setup info,
and then select Next:
Server name: Enter the name of your
incoming mail server, such as
mail.myisp.com.
Confirm home time zone: Select the
pick list and select the time zone where
you live.
Port: Enter the port number for your
incoming mail server, such as 110 (POP)
or 143 (IMAP).
Enable weather info for my ZIP code:
Enter the ZIP code where you live if you
want to receive local weather reports.
POP: If you are connecting to a POP
server, check the POP box. If you are
connecting to an IMAP server, leave this
7
Select OK to continue.
T H E W I R E L E S S S Y N C A P P L I C A T I O N
84
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
box empty. If you are not sure which
type of server you’re connecting to,
contact your email provider.
TIP The Wireless Sync and VersaMail
applications require the correct protocol,
server, and security settings to send and
receive email. Your email provider can easily
provide these settings.
Leave messages on server: Check this
box if you want to leave a copy of your
messages on the mail server after you
download them to your smartphone. If
you want to delete the messages from
your mail server after downloading
them to your smartphone, leave this box
empty.
Setting up Wireless Sync to work with
corporate email
If your company uses a Microsoft
Exchange Server or a Domino server,
follow these steps to set up your email
account settings in the Wireless Sync
application. If your company uses a
different type of mail server, see Setting up
instructions.
10 When the Congratulations message
appears, select Done.
11 During the first sync you are prompted
to select one of the following:
Refresh: Replaces Calendar and
Contacts on your smartphone with
information on the server. (Not
recommended for POP and IMAP
users.)
1
2
Press Wireless Sync
.
Select Start to download the Wireless
Sync software to your smartphone. (The
download takes a few minutes.)
Merge: Merges items on your
smartphone with items on the server.
3
4
When asked if your company has a sync
server, leave the box unchecked, and
then select Next.
The first sync can take several minutes;
once complete, Wireless Sync is ready to
keep you up-to-date.
Select Ye s , No, or Forgot to indicate
whether you have a Wireless Sync
T H E W I R E L E S S S Y N C A P P L I C A T I O N
85
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
password. If you select No, your
smartphone’s web browser opens and
you are taken through a series of steps
to create an account. If you select
Forgot, Verizon Wireless sends a
temporary password to your
smartphone.
6
Set the following Account Setup info,
and then select Next:
Confirm home time zone: Select the
pick list and select the time zone where
you live.
Enable weather info for my ZIP code:
Enter the ZIP code where you live if you
want to receive local weather reports.
5
Set the following Account Setup info,
and then select Next:
7
Set the following Email Setup info, and
then select Next:
Mobile number: Enter your
smartphone’s phone number, if it is not
already filled in.
Set up Exchange or Domino email:
Select this setting to set up Wireless
Sync to work with your corporate email
account.
Password: Enter the password for your
Wireless Sync account.
Read Terms & Conditions: Select this
button to read about your Wireless Sync
account.
Email Address: Enter the email address
you want Wireless Sync to access. For
example, if you want Wireless Sync to
access your work email, enter the email
address you use at work, such as
jane.doe@anycorp.com.
I agree to the terms & conditions:
Check the box to indicate that you agree
to the terms and conditions. You cannot
continue unless you check this box.
8
9
When the Congratulations message
appears, select Done.
NOTE You are prompted to scribble on the
screen to create a random number for
encryption.
On your computer, go to
install the software that lets Wireless
Sync work with your server.
T H E W I R E L E S S S Y N C A P P L I C A T I O N
86
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
10 During the first sync you are prompted
4
5
Enter the URL for your company’s
Wireless Sync server, and then select
Next.
to select one of the following:
Refresh: Replaces Calendar and
Contacts on your smartphone with
information on the server.
Select Ye s or No to indicate whether
you have a Wireless Sync password. If
you select No, your smartphone’s web
browser opens and you are taken
through a series of steps to create an
account.
Merge: Merges items on your
smartphone with items on the server.
The first sync can take several minutes;
once complete, Wireless Sync is ready to
keep you up-to-date.
6
Set the following Account Setup info,
and then select Next:
Mobile number: Enter your corporate
login in this field. This may be your
username or may include your
corporate domain information. Contact
your Wireless Sync administrator for
more information.
Setting up Wireless Sync to work with a
corporate Wireless Sync server
If your company uses a Wireless Sync
server to connect to your Microsoft
Exchange Server or a Domino server,
follow these steps to set up your email
account settings in the Wireless Sync
application.
Password: Enter the corporate
password.
Read Terms & Conditions: Select this
button to read about your Wireless Sync
account.
1
2
Press Wireless Sync
.
Select Start to download the Wireless
Sync software to your smartphone. (The
download takes a few minutes.)
I agree to the terms & conditions:
Check the box to indicate that you agree
to the terms and conditions. You cannot
continue unless you check this box.
3
Check the box asking if your company
has a Wireless Sync server, and then
select Next.
T H E W I R E L E S S S Y N C A P P L I C A T I O N
87
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
7
Set the following Account Setup info,
and then select Next:
The VersaMail®
application
Confirm home time zone: Select the
pick list and select the time zone where
you live.
Before you can use the VersaMail
application, you need to install the
VersaMail software and enter your email
account settings. If you have multiple email
accounts, you must enter settings for each
email account.
Enable weather info for my ZIP code:
Enter the ZIP code where you live if you
want to receive local weather reports.
8
9
When the Congratulations message
appears, select Done.
After you install the VersaMail software,
you can find additional information on using
and customizing the VersaMail application
in the User Guide for the VersaMail
755pverizon.
During the first sync you are prompted
to select one of the following:
Refresh: Replaces Calendar and
Contacts on your smartphone with
information on the server.
Merge: Merges items on your
smartphone with items on the server.
NOTE Your smartphone comes with the
VersaMail application version 3.5.4. If you
are using the VersaMail application version
4.0 or higher, the instructions in this
section do not apply to you. Follow the
instructions that came with the VersaMail
application version 4.0 instead.
The first sync can take several minutes;
once complete, Wireless Sync is ready to
keep you up-to-date.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
88
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
How do I get started?
• BellSouth
1
from www.palm.com/mypalm/
755pverizon-bonus and install it on your
smartphone. See Installing applications
for details.
• Cablevision
• Charter
• Comcast
• CompuServe
• Concentric
• Covad
2
If either of the following is true, read the
User Guide for the VersaMail
Application:
• Cox Central
• Cox East
• Cox West
• EarthLink
• Gmail
• You used the VersaMail application on
®
your previous Palm OS device, and
you want to transfer those settings to
your smartphone.
• You plan to use the VersaMail
application to access an email account
on a Microsoft Exchange server, a
Lotus Notes server, or a Microsoft
MAPI server.
• Juno
• Mail.com
• NetZero
• RCN
3
If your email provider is listed here, then
• SBC/PacBell
• SBC/Prodigy
• Speakeasy
• USA.net
• Verizon DSL
• Yahoo!
• AOL
• Apple.Mac
• AT&T Global
• AT&T Worldnet
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
89
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
4
If your email provider’s name is not
listed, then you need to obtain the
following info from your system
administrator or ISP, and then skip to
Setting up the VersaMail application to
work with common providers
1
Press Applications
and select
Email
to open the VersaMail
application.
2
3
If the Initial Setup dialog box appears,
select Continue.
• Mail protocol: POP or IMAP
• Incoming and outgoing mail server
names, such as mail.myisp.com
Make up a name that describes this
account and enter it in the Account
Name field. For example, Work Email.
• Incoming and outgoing mail server
port numbers, such as 110 (incoming
POP), 143 (incoming IMAP), or 25
(outgoing POP or IMAP)
4
Select the Mail Service pick list, select
your email provider (such as Earthlink),
and then select Next.
• (If necessary) Security settings: APOP,
ESMTP, SSL
TIP The correct protocol, server, and security
settings are required for the VersaMail
application to be able to send and receive
email for your account. Your email provider
can easily provide these settings. You may be
able to find this account setup info on your
email provider’s website.
5
Enter the username for your email
account. Your username appears before
the @ symbol in your email address.
NOTE For some email providers, such as
Gmail, your username is your entire email
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
90
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
address. Check with your email provider if
you are not sure what to enter as your
username.
your system administrator or ISP), and
then select Next.
6
Select the Password box, enter your
email account password, select OK, and
then select Next.
7
Select Next, and then select Done.
TIP To enter settings for another email
account, open the Accounts menu and select
Account Setup.
6
Enter the username for your email
account. Your username appears before
the @ symbol in your email address.
Setting up the VersaMail application to
work with other providers
NOTE For some email providers, such as
Gmail, your username is your entire email
address. Check with your email provider if
you are not sure what to enter as your
username.
1
Press Applications
and select
Email
to open the VersaMail
application.
2
3
If the Initial Setup dialog box appears,
select Continue.
Make up a name that describes this
account and enter it in the Account
Name field. For example, Work Email.
7
8
9
Select the Password box, enter your
email account password, select OK, and
then select Next.
4
5
Select the Mail Service pick list, and
then select Other.
Enter your email address and the
names of the incoming and outgoing
mail servers, and then select Next.
Select the Protocol pick list, select POP
or IMAP (based on the info you got from
If your system administrator or ISP
provided port numbers or security
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
91
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
settings, select Advanced, and then
4
Select one of the following:
enter those settings.
Send: Connects and sends all
messages immediately. If the message
cannot be sent for any reason, the
message is stored in your Outbox.
TIP You can also select Advanced to set more
options for incoming and outgoing messages.
Outbox: Stores the message to be sent
later.
10 Select Done.
Creating and sending email messages
Drafts: Saves the message so you can
continue working on it at another time.
1
2
From the Inbox, select New.
Begin entering one of the following for
the addressee:
Cancel: Returns to the message list
without saving the message.
• Email address
• First name
• Last name
TIP If you enter address info that matches one
or more of your contacts, the VersaMail
application displays the matching contacts. To
accept a suggestion, select the correct
contact. To send to a different address, keep
entering the email address or name.
DID YOU KNOW? The VersaMail application
makes up to five attempts to send a message;
if it is still not successful, an alert message
appears and you must try to manually send
the message again.
3
Enter the subject and message text.
TIP To move between fields, press Up or
Down on the 5-way.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
92
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Adding attachments to your email
messages
4
5
On the Select Media screen, select the
Album pick list to go to the album
containing the photo or video you want,
and then check the box to the left of the
photo or video.
You can attach several types of files to your
email messages.
Select Done.
TIP To remove an attachment, select the file in
the Attachments box, and then select
Delete.
TIP To attach more than one file to a message,
repeat steps 3 and 4.
Attaching photos and videos
Attaching ringtones
1
Create the message to which you want
to attach the photo or video.
1
Create the message to which you want
to attach the ringtone.
2
On the New Message screen, select
2
On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
the red paper clip
upper-right corner.
icon in the
upper-right corner.
3
From the Type pick list, select Photo/
3
From the Type pick list, select Sounds.
Video.
TIP Ringtones that are copy-protected appear
in the Sounds application with a lock icon. You
can use these ringtones on your phone, but
you cannot send them as attachments.
4
5
Select the ringtone you want, and then
select Insert.
Select Done.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
93
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Attaching Word, Excel®, PowerPoint®, and Receiving and viewing email messages
PDF files
1
2
From any mailbox, select Get or Get &
Send.
1
Create the message to which you want
to attach the file.
From the Inbox, select the message you
want to view.
2
On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
upper-right corner.
3
4
5
From the Type pick list, select
Documents.
Select the file you want on the
Documents screen.
Select Done.
Attaching other types of files
1
Create the message to which you want
to attach the item.
2
On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
upper-right corner.
3
From the Type pick list, select the type
of file to attach—for example, Address,
Appointment, or Memo/Text.
4
5
Select the item you want from the list in
the Type box.
3
If a large incoming message is
truncated, select More
.
Select Done.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
94
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
2
Tap the attachment name at the bottom
of the message screen to view it in the
default viewer on your smartphone.
TIP When viewing a message, tap the scroll
arrows at the top of the screen to view the
previous or next message.
TIP You can also tap the folder icon to the left
of the attachment name to open a menu of
tasks you can do with the attachment,
4
Select Done.
including View, Install, or Unzip, depending
on the attachment file type; Save to card to
save the attachment to an expansion card; or
select Viewer to select the application you
want to use to view the attachment.
Viewing attachments
There are a number of attachment types
you can open with the built-in software
on your smartphone (for example,
Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint
files; PDF files; ringtones, and photos).
3
When you finish with the attachment,
select Done to return to the
Attachments dialog box.
1
From any folder, open the message with
the attachment you want to view.
Messages with downloaded
NOTE If there is no Done button, press
Applications and select Email
attachments appear with a paper clip
icon to the left of the message icon.
to
return to the account’s Inbox.
TIP If an attachment is not downloaded
because it is larger than your maximum
message size, the paper clip icon does not
appear, and the attachment does not display
at the bottom of the message screen. Select
More to download and display any
attachments.
Replying to or forwarding email
messages
When you respond to messages, you can
select whether to include the original text
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
95
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
The message includes a meeting
invitation.
DID YOU KNOW? The VersaMail application
sends all messages as plain text only, with all
HTML tags stripped, even if you are
forwarding or replying to a message that was
originally received as HTML.
This message has high priority.
You can rearrange the message list to
make it easier to find and view messages.
1
2
From the Inbox or another folder, open
the message you want to respond to.
•
In the Inbox, select Sort, and then
select one of the following: Sort by
Date, Sort by Name, or Sort by
Subject.
In Message View, select Reply. Select
whether to reply to just the sender or to
reply to both the sender and all
addressees on the message.
•
To quickly switch between folders in list
view, select the folder pick list at the
top of the screen and select the desired
folder.
3
4
Enter your reply.
Select Send.
Managing your messages
Deleting selected messages from the
Inbox
The status icons that appear near the
messages in your Inbox indicate the
following:
When you delete a message from the
Inbox, it moves to the Trash folder.
The message is unread when the
subject appears in bold.
1
Select the bullet next to the icon of each
message that you want to delete. To
select adjacent messages, drag the
stylus so it touches the bullet to the left
of each message. Lift the stylus and
drag again to select more adjacent
messages.
The message includes an
attachment.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
96
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
2
3
4
Press Menu
.
Switching accounts
Select Delete on the Message menu.
If you create more than one email account
in the VersaMail application, you need to
switch from account to account to get,
send, and otherwise manage the
messages in each account.
If a confirmation dialog box appears,
select OK to confirm deletion.
TIP To delete a single message, select the
envelope icon next to the message, and then
select Delete from the list.
1
2
Press Menu
.
Select Accounts, and then select an
account.
Deleting messages by date
You can quickly delete a group of
messages by selecting a range of dates.
DID YOU KNOW? If you assign the VersaMail
application to a quick button, you can press
that button repeatedly to switch between your
different email accounts.
1
2
Press Menu
.
Select Delete Old on the Message
menu.
Customizing your email settings
3
Select the folder and a date range for
the messages you want to delete.
You can customize the VersaMail settings
for each individual email account on your
smartphone. The preferences you set apply
only to the email account you are currently
viewing. If you have multiple accounts,
configure each account separately.
4
5
Select OK.
If a confirmation dialog box appears,
select OK to confirm deletion.
TIP To empty (or purge) the Trash folder, open
the Message menu and select Empty Trash.
For example, settings you can customize
include the following:
•
Set a schedule to automatically retrieve
email messages
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
97
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
•
•
Set preferences for how and when
messages are retrieved
3
Select Auto Sync.
Add a signature to an outgoing message
For complete information on all of the
email settings you can customize, see the
User Guide for the VersaMail Application at
www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon.
Scheduling Auto Sync
4
5
Check the Auto-sync box.
You can set up the VersaMail application to
automatically download new email
messages to your smartphone with the
Auto Sync feature.
Select the Every pick list and select the
time interval, from 5 minutes to
12 hours.
NOTE If you set a more frequent interval,
you may need to recharge your Treo battery
more often.
TIP You need to set up a separate Auto Sync
schedule for each email account. This feature
may not work with email accounts that require
VPN connection. For additional info on using
the VersaMail application with a VPN
connection, see Connecting to a virtual private
the VersaMail Application at www.palm.com/
mypalm/755pverizon.
6
Select the Start Time and End Time
boxes, and then select the hour, the
minute, and AM or PM to enter the time
for the first and last Auto Sync to take
place. Select OK.
7
8
Select the days you want the schedule
to be active. You can choose any
number of days, but you can set up only
one schedule for each email account.
1
2
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
Select OK, and then select Get Mail.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
98
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Setting preferences for getting messages
TIP After you set up a scheduled Auto Sync
and select Get Mail, from then on, only new
messages are retrieved during Auto Sync.
1
2
3
From any mailbox screen, press
Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
Selecting alert tones
Select Incoming.
When you schedule Auto Sync for a given
account, you can choose a sound—such as
a bird, a phone, or an alarm—to let you
know when new email arrives.
1
From any mailbox screen, press
Menu
.
2
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
3
4
Select Alerts.
Check the Alert me of new mail box.
4
Set any of the following preferences,
and then select OK:
TIP To receive notifications of successful Auto
Sync retrievals only, uncheck the Alert me of
auto sync failures box. Leave the box
checked if you want to receive notifications of
both successful and failed Auto Sync
retrievals.
Get: Indicates whether to get message
subjects only or entire messages.
Ask Every Time: Indicates if you want
to see a dialog box for selecting
subjects only or entire messages each
time you retrieve email. If the box is
unchecked, messages are retrieved
according to the option you select in the
Get pick list.
5
6
Select the Alert Sound pick list, and
then select a sound. Your Treo plays a
brief demo of the sound.
Select OK.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
99
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Unread messages (IMAP accounts
only): Downloads only unread mail to
your smartphone. If you don’t check this
box and you select Get & Send, all the
messages on your mail server are
downloaded to your Inbox, including
messages you’ve read.
including attachments. The maximum
message size that you can retrieve is
60KB for the body text and
approximately 5MB of total data for any
attachments.
Message Format: Sets the format for
messages you retrieve.
HTML: Displays messages sent in
HTML format with basic formatting
intact and displays other messages as
plain text.
TIP The POP protocol does not support
retrieval of only unread mail from the server. If
you have a POP email account, the VersaMail
application downloads all messages
regardless of whether you have read them,
and regardless of whether the Unread
messages box is checked.
Text: Displays all messages as plain
text, regardless of the format in which
they were sent.
Mail from last: Gets messages sent
within the number of days you specify.
Attaching a signature to a message
You can attach a personal signature, with
info like your company’s address and
phone numbers, to the bottom of all
messages you send.
Download attachments: Automatically
downloads files attached to email,
except for attachments that exceed the
maximum message size.
1
From any mailbox screen, press
Menu
Maximum message size: Sets the
maximum size of an incoming email
message. Enter the size in kilobytes
(KB). The default is 5KB, but you can
enter any size up to 2048KB
.
2
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
[approximately 2 megabytes (MB)],
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
100
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
3
4
5
Select Signature.
continues to synchronize with Outlook on
your computer.
Check the Attach Signature box.
Enter your signature information, and
then select OK.
For complete info on using a Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync account, see the
User Guide for the VersaMail Application at
www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon.
Working with Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with
the VersaMail application, Calendar, and
Contacts on your smartphone to directly
access corporate groupware information
on a Microsoft Exchange 2003 or 2007
server. Information in these applications is
pushed directly from the server to your
smartphone or wirelessly synchronizes
directly with the server fro your
Messaging
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your
on and off) and that you are in a coverage
area.
You can use the Messaging application to
exchange brief text messages (SMS) and
multimedia messages (MMS) with other
devices and email addresses that support
these forms of messaging. Before you use
your smartphone to send or receive
messages, refer to your service plan for
pricing and availability of messaging
services.
smartphone without using a desktop
computer.
When you create a Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync account in the VersaMail
application, your email, calendar, and
contact info is pushed from or syncs
directly with the server; information does
not sync with Microsoft Outlook® (sold
separately) on your computer. Other
information that is stored on your
computer, such as tasks and memos,
M E S S A G I N G
101
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
• If the recipient is in your Contacts list,
enter the first initial and last name (no
spaces), and then select the
recipient’s phone number or email
address, depending on where you
want to send the message.
DID YOU KNOW? You can address messages to
multiple recipients by separating the
addresses with a comma. If you address a
single message to three people, you may be
billed for three messages (depending on your
Verizon Wireless service plan).
• If the recipient’s name isn’t in the list
of recent addresses or your Contacts
list, enter the phone number, email
address, or a Verizon Wireless alias.
Creating and sending a text message
Each text message can hold up to 160
characters. Messages with more than 160
characters are automatically split into
several messages. (If you send a text
message to an email address, the email
address is deducted from the
TIP If you see numbers when you expect to
see letters (or the other way around), you
need to turn Option Lock on by pressing
Option twice or turn it off by pressing Option
once.
160-character count.)
DID YOU KNOW? You can page someone to call
you by sending them a blank text message.
4
Enter your message or select
QuickText
to insert predefined
phrases. To insert emoticons, select
.
1
Press Applications
and select
Messaging
.
TIP To add a new QuickText phrase, select
Edit QuickText from the list.
2
3
Select New.
Select the To field to address the
message:
NOTE Some symbols can’t be used in text
messages. The Messaging application
automatically replaces invalid characters.
• Press Center
If the recipient’s
name appears in the list of recent
addresses, select it from the list.
M E S S A G I N G
102
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Creating and sending a multimedia
message
KEY TERM Slide A collection of text, pictures,
videos, and sounds that are grouped together
within a multimedia message. During
playback, all the items within a particular slide
appear on the same screen. If a multimedia
message contains multiple slides, you can
view each slide separately during playback.
5
6
(Optional) Press Menu
select High Priority from the Compose
menu to mark the message as urgent.
, and then
KEY TERM Pix Place The companion website
for Verizon Wireless picture and video
messaging services.
Select Send.
Multimedia messages consist of text,
photos, videos, and sounds presented as
one or more slides. Even if your
smartphone does not include a camera,
you can still send, receive, and view photos
and videos. You can include any of the
following items:
TIP Select Save as Draft to save a draft of the
message without sending it. To access the
draft, select the folder list in the title bar and
select Drafts.
Item
Supported File Types
JPEG, GIF, BMP
MPEG4, 3GP2
MIDI
Pictures
Videos
Ringtones
Sound clips
WAV, QCELP
M E S S A G I N G
103
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
1
Press Applications
and select
Messaging
.
2
3
4
Select New.
Select Add Media.
Select the To field to address the
message with up to 25 addresses:
• Press Center
. If the recipient’s
name appears in the list of recent
addresses, select it from the list.
Attach image: Insert one or more
photos or videos from your smartphone
or an expansion card.
• If the recipient is in your Contacts list,
enter the first initial and last name (no
spaces), and then select the
recipient’s phone number or email
address.
Take new picture: Take a picture with
the built-in camera and add it to the
message.
• If the recipient’s name is not in the list
of recent addresses or your Contacts
list, enter the phone number, email
address, or alias.
Take new video: Capture a video of up
to 14 seconds with the built-in
camcorder and add it to the message.
• If you want to upload a picture or
video to your Verizon Wireless PIX
TIP When creating a message, you can
preview or delete an item. Highlight the item,
press Center on the 5-way, and then select
Remove, View, or Play.
Place account, press Center
, and
then select PixPlace.
5
6
Enter a subject.
(Optional) Select the image
placeholder, and then select one of the
following:
7
(Optional) Select Sound , and then
select one of the following:
M E S S A G I N G
104
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Record new: Record a sound clip of up smartphone to automatically download
to 1 minute.
new messages or to notify you that a
message is ready for you to download (see
can also configure how your smartphone
notifies you when a new message arrives
Attach voice memo: Select a memo
you recorded in the Voice Memo
application.
Attach ringtone: Select a ringtone.
8
9
Enter a text message or caption.
Select Add slide to insert additional
slides.
10 (Optional) Select Preview to view the
message as the recipient will see it.
11 (Optional) Press Menu
, and then
select High Priority from the Compose
menu to mark the message as urgent
12 Select Send.
The new message alert may include any of
the following buttons:
DID YOU KNOW? You can send a contact or
calendar entry. Select the entry, open the
Record menu, select Send, and then select
Messaging.
OK: Dismisses the alert and places the
message in your Inbox.
Reply: Opens Chat View, where you can
reply with a text message. To send an
MMS reply, select Add Media from the
Chat View.
Receiving messages
When your phone is turned on and in a
wireless coverage area, you automatically
receive new text messages. For
Call Back: Dials the sender’s phone
number.
multimedia messages, you can set your
M E S S A G I N G
105
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Go To Msg: Opens the message so you
can view its full contents.
3
Select the phone number, email
address, or URL (appears as underlined
blue text).
Delete: Removes the message from your
smartphone.
Your smartphone automatically launches
the appropriate application from the link.
TIP When you receive a message, you can
also press Send to call the sender.
Viewing/playing a multimedia message
1
Press Applications
Messaging
and select
TIP If you have multiple alerts, the Alert
screen displays all your pending alerts. Select
an item’s description to jump to that item, or
check the box to clear that item. To view all
your pending alerts from any screen on your
smartphone, press and hold Center on the
5-way.
.
2
3
Select the message you want to view.
If there are sounds or multiple slides,
playback begins immediately.
4
Do any of the following:
• Use the onscreen controls to scroll to
other slides and messages.
Using links in messages
When you receive a text message that
contains a telephone number, email
address, or URL, you can dial the number,
send an email message, or go to the web
page immediately.
1
Press Applications
Messaging
and select
.
2
Select the message that contains the
link you want to use.
• To play a sound, select audio clip
.
M E S S A G I N G
106
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
• To save a sound, press Menu
and select Save Sound from the
Message menu.
,
Arranging your messages
You can rearrange the messages in any
folder by using the Sort command.
• To save a picture, press Menu
and select Save Picture from the
Message menu. You can access
saved pictures later by pressing
,
1
Press Applications
Messaging
and select
.
Applications
Pics&Videos
and selecting
.
• To save a calendar or contact entry,
select it. You can access saved entries
later by pressing Applications
and selecting Calendar
or
Contacts (depending on the type
of entry you saved).
2
Select the folder list in the title bar and
select the folder you want to sort.
• To select the text, position the cursor
in the text area, and then press
3
4
Press Menu
.
Center
.
Select View, and then select Sort by
Name or Sort by Date.
• To stop playback of a message, select
Play/Stop.
• To view message details, press
Deleting messages
Menu
and select Message
You can delete several messages at once
from any folder by using the Purge
command.
Details from the Message menu.
5
Select Done.
1
Press Applications
Messaging
and select
.
M E S S A G I N G
107
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
2
Select the folder list in the title bar and
select the folder that contains the
messages you want to delete.
You can carry on multiple chats at the same
time and easily switch between them,
using the pick list at the top of the screen.
3
4
5
Press Menu
.
1
Press Applications
Messaging
Do one of the following:
and select
Select Purge from the Message menu.
.
Select the Purge pick list, and then
select older than 1 week, older than 2
weeks, older than 1 month, or all.
2
Start a new chat: Select a message
and reply to it.
6
Select OK.
Continue an existing chat: Select a
message with the chat
icon.
Chatting with Messaging
DID YOU KNOW? You can send and receive text
messages even while you are on a phone call.
This is easiest when using a hands-free
headset or the speakerphone.
When you exchange more than one
message with a single contact, the
messages you exchange with that person
are grouped into a chat session. When you
select a chat session from your message
list, the upper part of Chat View displays all
messages you’ve exchanged with this
contact, and the lower part provides an
entry area.
3
4
Enter your message.
TIP Pale gray text indicates that a message is
pending or enroute.
Select Send.
M E S S A G I N G
108
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Customizing your Messaging settings
SMS Receipts: Indicate whether you
want to receive a confirmation when an
outgoing SMS message is delivered.
1
Press Applications
and select
Messaging
.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Confirm message deletions: Indicate
whether you want deletion confirmation
prompts to appear.
From the Options menu, select
Preferences.
4
On the Messages tab, set any of the
following preferences for your individual
messages:
Privacy Mode (hide text): Indicate
whether you want the body text to
appear in the alert when you receive a
new message, or if you want the alert
to hide the text and prompt you to go to
the message.
5
Select the Chat tab and set any of the
following preferences for chat sessions.
New message: Indicate whether you
want to default to text or multimedia
messages when you create a new
message.
MMS Receipts: Indicate whether you
want to receive a confirmation when an
outgoing MMS message is delivered.
Create chats from messages: Indicate
when you want to group messages
from the same person into a chat.
M E S S A G I N G
109
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Show timestamps in chats: Indicate
whether you want to see the local date
and time the message was sent next to
each message.
Automatically collect MMS
messages: Indicate whether you want
to download multimedia messages
automatically.
Display my name in chat window as:
Enter the name you want to use as the
label for your messages in Chat View.
Even when roaming: Indicate whether
you want to automatically receive
multimedia messages while roaming.
Label color: Select a color to
7
Select OK.
differentiate your messages from the
sender’s messages while in Chat View.
Selecting Messaging alert tones
Use color for: Indicate whether you
want both your name and message text
in the selected label color, or only your
name.
DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a
silent alert that can vibrate even when the
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off.
6
Select the Network tab and set any of
the following preferences for network
connections.
1
Press Applications
and select
Messaging
.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Alerts.
M E S S A G I N G
110
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
What are all those icons?
TIP By default, the Messaging app shows the
Inbox folder. To view a different folder, select
the folder list in the title bar and select a
different folder from the list.
The message descriptions in the Inbox,
Outbox, and Sent folders show the
message status:
4
5
6
Select the Application pick list and
select Messaging.
•
•
•
Unread messages appear in bold.
Read messages appear in plain text.
Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
Urgent messages appear with a red
exclamation point (!).
Select the Vibrate pick list and select
how you want your smartphone to
vibrate upon an incoming message.
The following icons show the message
type and additional status info:
7
8
Select the Message Tone pick list and
select a tone for incoming message
alerts.
A text message
A chat session
A voicemail page
Check the boxes if you want to see
onscreen alerts when a new message
arrives and when a message you sent is
received.
An incoming message with an error
A message that is waiting to be sent
9
Select Done.
M E S S A G I N G
111
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
A message that was successfully
sent
A message that was sent to multiple
recipients, and only some of the
recipients received the message
An outgoing message with an error
DID YOU KNOW? If you are outside a coverage
area or if your phone is turned off, outgoing
messages go into the Outbox. When you
return to a coverage area or turn your phone
back on, your pending messages are sent
automatically and transferred to the Sent
folder.
M E S S A G I N G
112
CHAPTER
5
Your connections to the web
and wireless devices
You use the web for many things: driving directions, shopping,
news, web-based email. Now, with the Verizon Wireless
network and the built-in web browser, you can take the web
with you almost anywhere.
The built-in Bluetooth® feature of your Palm® Treo™ 755P
smartphone helps you easily set up wireless connections to a
number of devices, so you can enjoy the convenience of
cable-free connectivity. You can also use your smartphone to
connect your computer to the Internet and to share contacts or
your favorite photos with other people.
Benefits
•
Carry the web with you
•
•
Connect to Bluetooth devices
•
Store web pages for offline
viewing
Connect your computer to the
Internet through your smartphone
113
In this chapter
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
pages into a single column and resizes
images on your screen. This way, you can
see most content without scrolling left or
right.
Web browser
The Blazer® web browser on your
smartphone provides quick and easy
access to web pages. You can view most
sites you use on your computer, including
those with security and advanced features,
such as JavaScript and frames. To browse
the web, you must activate data services
from Verizon Wireless.
DID YOU KNOW? You can send email from a web
page on your smartphone. Email addresses
appear as links on web pages. After you
configure an email application on your
smartphone, you can select an email address
link to create a message to the selected
address.
DID YOU KNOW? You can visit secure websites.
The security certificates and 128-bit Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption let you
browse secure sites, such as online shopping,
banking, and email. Remember: Some secure
sites also require specific browsers and may
not work with the web browser application.
DID YOU KNOW? The web browser supports
JavaScript, SSL strong encryption, and
cookies, but does not support plug-ins (such
as Flash or Shockwave) or Java applets.
1
2
Make sure your phone is turned on (see
you are in a coverage area.
Viewing a web page
The web browser uses patent-pending
technology to optimize web pages for your
smartphone. By default, the browser is in
Optimized Mode, which reformats web
Press Applications
Web
and select
.
W E B B R O W S E R
115
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
NOTE Trouble connecting to the Internet?
Internet for troubleshooting tips.
page. In Wide Page mode, use the
stylus to select a link.
Submit a form: Enter the info and then
select the onscreen button to submit
the form. If the form doesn’t have an
3
Enter a web page address (URL) in the
Address Bar and select Go.
onscreen button, press Return
.
NOTE If you browse to a secure web
page, a lock
Address Bar.
icon appears in the
TIP To adjust the font size, open the Options
menu and select Font. To fit more text on the
screen, select Small. To make the text easier
to read, select Large.
4
Do any of the following to navigate
within the web page:
5
Use the 5-way
the following icons in the title bar:
to access any of
View a page in wide layout format (as
on your computer): Press Menu
,
select Options, and then select Wide
Page Mode.
Goes to the previous web page.
Goes to the next web page.
Scroll through the page: In Optimized
Mode (the default format which is
optimized for your smartphone screen),
Refreshes the page with the
latest content from the Internet.
press Up
or Down . In Wide Page
Mode, press Up , Down , Left
,
Opens a list where you can
or Right to scroll in all directions.
select Fast Mode (no images or
style sheets) or Normal Mode
(with images and style sheets).
Follow a link to another web page: In
Optimized Mode, highlight the link by
pressing Left or Right and then
press Center
to go to the selected
W E B B R O W S E R
116
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
Opens a dialog box where you
to 100 bookmarks or saved pages, allowing
you to open your favorite web pages
quickly. Note that a bookmark is different
from a favorite (see Defining favorite
buttons).
can enter a web address you
want to go to or view a list of
recently viewed web pages.
Goes to your home page.
Displays a list of your
bookmarks and saved pages.
DID YOU KNOW? The predefined bookmarks
take you to pages that are optimized for your
smartphone.
1
2
3
Go to the page you want to bookmark.
Press Menu
TIP To find a recent page or search, select the
Address Bar pick list and select the item from
the list.
.
Select Add Bookmark from the Page
menu.
TIP Want to get to the icons faster? Press
Space to jump to the Address Bar and then
press Up on the 5-way to scroll to the icons.
You can also press Menu to access the same
commands from the menus.
4
5
(Optional) Change the entries in the
Name and Description fields.
Select OK, and then select OK again.
TIP You can customize the Fast Mode
settings for details.
TIP Tap and hold the Back or Forward buttons
or select these buttons with the 5-way to pop
up a list of sites you’ve visited.
Creating a bookmark
With bookmarks you can instantly access a
web page without entering the address
every time. The web browser can store up
W E B B R O W S E R
117
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
Saving a page
You can use the web browser to save a
page for offline viewing, so you don’t need
a wireless connection to view it later.
1
2
3
4
Go to the page you want to save.
Press Menu
.
Select Save Page from the Page menu.
Select OK, and then select OK again.
TIP To go back to the last web page you
viewed without selecting a bookmark, select
Page View.
Viewing bookmarks or saved pages
Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in
Bookmarks View. Saved pages are
indicated by a small triangle in the
upper-right corner of the bookmark.
Editing or deleting a bookmark or saved
page
1
2
3
From Bookmarks View, press
Menu
.
DID YOU KNOW? You can make Bookmarks View
the default view when you open the browser.
Open the Options menu and select
Preferences. Select the Start With pick list
and select Bookmarks.
Select Edit Bookmarks on the
Bookmarks menu.
Select the bookmark you want to edit or
delete.
TIP If you can’t edit, delete, or beam a
bookmark, it is probably locked and these
actions are prohibited.
1
2
Select the Bookmarks View
icon.
Select the bookmark or saved page you
want to view.
4
5
Enter the desired changes.
Select OK.
W E B B R O W S E R
118
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
Arranging bookmarks and saved pages
Downloading files from a web page
Bookmarks View includes ten pages for
bookmarks so that you can arrange
The web browser lets you download files
that are recognized by one of the
bookmarks and saved pages in a logical
fashion. For example, you can store travel
applications on your smartphone. When
you download a file, you can open it in the
links on one bookmark page, stock links on application that recognizes the file. For
another, and business links on a third page. example, download an MP3 file so you can
listen to it later in the Pocket Tunes™
1
From Bookmarks View, press
application. If a file is not recognized by any
of the applications on your smartphone,
you can download the file to an expansion
card, but you cannot open it on your
smartphone.
Menu
.
2
Select Edit Bookmarks from the
Bookmarks menu.
You can download files such as new
applications, and choose to play or save
music and video files in many popular
formats—provided that the website
permits the downloading of files:
Item
Supported File Types
JPEG, WBMP, GIF
MP4, 3G2, ASF, WMV
MIDI, AAC
3
4
Enter a title for this page of bookmarks.
Pictures
Videos
Ringtones
Music
Use the stylus to drag and drop a
bookmark into the desired slot. You can
move a bookmark within the current
page or move it to a different bookmark
page by dragging and dropping it on the
MP3, WMA
Bookmark Page
icon.
TIP You can also access software and other
downloads using the Downloads bookmark.
5
Select OK.
W E B B R O W S E R
119
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
1
2
Go to the page with the link to the file
you want to download.
TIP The web browser recognizes streamed
content that is not supported by any of the
applications on your smartphone, and it
displays a Media type not supported
message.
Press Left or Right to highlight the
link to the file, and then press Center
.
3
4
If prompted, select what you want to do
with the file: Play, Save To Device, or
Save To Card.
2
Once streaming begins, playback starts
automatically. Use the following
controls when viewing or listening:
Select Yes.
• Select
to return to the web page
TIP You can also save an image from a web
page by tapping and holding it with the stylus.
containing the streamed content.
• Select
pause playback.
or press Center
to
to
Streaming files from a web page
• Select
or press Center
The web browser lets you stream files that
are recognized by one of the applications
on your smartphone. For example, you can
choose to play music and video files in
many popular formats (MP3, WMA, WMV).
resume playback after pausing.
• A few seconds after playback begins,
the toolbar is hidden and you can view
the content on the full screen. Press
Up
or Down
to display the
toolbar; press Up
again to hide the toolbar again.
or Down
1
When the web browser recognizes
streamed content on a web page, it
displays a Play
listen to the streamed content, select
Play
icon. To view or
• Press the Volume button on the side
of your smartphone to adjust the
volume.
.
W E B B R O W S E R
120
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
Copying text from a web page
3
4
Press Down to navigate through the
list.
You can copy text from a web page and
paste it into other applications.
Select the web page you want to load.
1
Use the stylus to highlight the text you
want to copy.
Finding text on a web page
1
2
From Page View, press Menu
.
2
3
4
Press Menu
.
Select Find Text on Page from the
Select Edit, and then select Copy.
Page menu.
Go to the app in which you want to
paste the text and use the stylus or
3
4
Enter the text you want to find.
Check or uncheck the Wrap Search box
to indicate whether you want the search
to wrap from the end of the page to the
beginning when the end is reached.
5-way
where you want to paste the text.
Press Menu
to position the cursor
5
6
.
Select Edit, and then select Paste.
5
Select Find to start the search.
DID YOU KNOW? If the web browser does not
recognize a phone number as dialable, you
can copy the phone number (as text) and
paste it into the Dial Pad (see Dialing from a
Customizing your web browser settings
1
2
From Page View, press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
3
Select Page and set any of the following
preferences:
Returning to recently viewed pages
The History list stores the addresses of the
last 100 pages you visited. Items in the
History list are sorted chronologically.
Start With: Determines which view
appears when you open the browser.
1
2
From Page View, press Menu
.
Select History from the Page menu.
W E B B R O W S E R
121
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
Home Page: Sets the page that appears
when you select
Auto-complete: Determines whether
the web browser suggests text, based
on your previous entries, when you
begin entering info.
.
Restore Default: Selects the original
home page, if you changed it.
Disable cookies: Determines whether
websites can store personalized info on
your Treo smartphone. Some sites do
not work properly if you select this
option.
Show Address Bar: Sets whether the
web address appears in Page View.
When it is visible, you can select the
pick list to go to a previously viewed
page or enter a URL directly from Page
View.
Disable JavaScript: Bypasses
JavaScript elements on the web pages
you view.
4
Select General and set any of the
following preferences:
Tap and Drag: Determines whether
dragging the stylus selects text or
scrolls through the content of the page.
Normal mode/Fast mode: Determines
whether you want to hide selected
items so that web pages load faster.
W E B B R O W S E R
122
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
When you select Fast mode, you can
set the following options:
Disable cascading style sheets:
Determines whether style sheets are
applied when you load a web page.
When style sheets are disabled, pages
download faster, but you may lose
some of the formatting.
Cookies: Indicates how much memory
is being used by cookies. To free up this
memory, select Clear Cookies.
KEY TERM Cascading style sheets A method
used to describe the presentation of a web
page or document written in a markup
language, such as HTML or XML.
Cache: Indicates how much memory is
being used by your cache to store
recent pages and history. To free up this
memory, select Clear Cache.
Don’t download images! Determines
whether images appear when you load
a web page. If you select not to view
images, then web pages load faster. You
can still see any image by tapping and
holding its placeholder box.
Clear cache on exit: Determines
whether the cache clears each time you
exit the web browser.
Set Proxy: Sets up a proxy server to
access the Internet. If your connection
requires a proxy server, please contact
your Internet service provider or IT
administrator for this information.
5
Select Advanced and set any of the
following preferences:
Set memory limit for storing pages:
Sets the memory available for your
cache. Pages are cached so that they
load faster the next time you view
them.
6
Select OK.
W E B B R O W S E R
123
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
BroadbandAccess
TIP Certain smartphone application features,
such as synchronizing or automatic retrieval of
email messages, do not work when you have
a BroadbandAccess Connect connection
between your smartphone and your
computer. To use these features, terminate
the BroadbandAccess Connect connection.
Connect
The BroadbandAccess Connect service
lets you convert your smartphone into a
wireless modem so that you can access
the Internet from your computer. You can
set up BroadbandAccess Connect using
the USB sync cable between your
smartphone and your Windows computer.
If you have a Mac computer enabled with
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
set up a wireless connection to use
TIP You may need to use a virtual private
network (VPN) to access corporate email.
Check with your system administrator and
more information.
Installing the VZAccess Manager software
To use the BroadbandAccess Connect
service, you must install the VZAccess
Manager software on your computer.
BroadbandAccess Connect using your
smartphone’s built-in Bluetooth technology.
The VZAccess Manager software helps you
set up and manage your BroadbandAccess
Connect connections.
WINDOWS ONLY
1
2
Insert the Palm Software Installation CD
in your computer’s CD drive.
On the Additional Resources screen,
select Connect to the Internet with
VZAccess Manager.
3
4
Follow the instructions to begin
installation.
On the Welcome screen, click Next.
B R O A D B A N D A C C E S S C O N N E C T
124
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
5
6
Select the option to accept the License
Agreement, and then click Next.
4
5
On the Welcome screen, click Next.
Select the option to accept the License
Agreement, and then click Next.
Select whether you want to use
VZAccess Manager with one
smartphone only or with all
smartphones you use on this computer,
and then select whether or not to create
a desktop shortcut. Click Next.
6
Select the device name for each device
you want to use with VZAccess
Manager, and then select whether or
not to create a desktop shortcut. Click
Next.
7
8
9
Select the folder where you want to
store the VZAccess Manager
application files, or select Next to
accept the default location.
Getting help with VZAccess Manager
software
You can learn how to use VZAccess
Manager software from within the
application itself.
Select whether to do a Typical or a
Custom installation (we recommend
Typical), and then click Next to begin
the installation process.
1
If you chose to install a desktop
shortcut, click the VZAccess Manager
icon on your desktop. Otherwise, use
the Start menu on your Windows
computer to navigate to and select the
VZAccess Manager software.
On the Installation Complete screen,
click Finish.
MAC ONLY
1
2
3
On your computer, go to
Click the link to download the Mac
version of the VZAccess Manager
software.
2
Click Help at the top of the screen and
Follow the onscreen instructions to
begin installation.
select a topic to learn more.
B R O A D B A N D A C C E S S C O N N E C T
125
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
Accessing the Internet using a
BroadbandAccess Connect connection
DID YOU KNOW? When the BroadbandAccess
Connect service is on, you cannot use any of
the wireless features on your smartphone
that require a data connection, such as web
browsing and sending and receiving email
and MMS messages. You can still use all the
nonwireless features of your smartphone. If
you choose to make a call, you automatically
interrupt the BroadbandAccess Connect
connection. When you receive a call in a
BroadbandAccess coverage area, the call
interrupts the BroadbandAccess Connect
connection. In a NationalAccess coverage
area, incoming calls go to voicemail.
1
Connect your smartphone to your
computer with the sync cable (see
2
3
4
Click the VZAccess Manager icon on
your computer desktop.
Click the connection you want to use,
such as BroadbandAccess.
Click Connect.
You can now use the BroadbandAccess
Connect service to access the Internet
from your computer.
Terminating a BroadbandAccess Connect
Internet session
1
On your computer, go to the VZAccess
Manager window.
2
Click Disconnect.
Creating a Bluetooth partnership between
your smartphone and your computer
1
Make sure that your computer’s
Bluetooth setting is on and that your
computer is ready to create a Bluetooth
partnership. Check the documentation
that came with your computer to find
and change these settings.
B R O A D B A N D A C C E S S C O N N E C T
126
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
2
3
On your smartphone, press
5
Select Add Device. The discovery icon
appears, indicating that the discovery
process is active.
Applications
Bluetooth
and select
.
Select Bluetooth On if it is not
selected, and then select Setup
Devices.
6
7
Select your computer from the Trusted
Devices list, and then select OK.
Enter a passkey on the Bluetooth
Security screen, and then select OK.
The passkey can be any number of up
to 16 characters.
IMPORTANT You must enter the same
passkey on your smartphone and your
computer. We recommend that you use a
passkey of 16 digits where possible to
improve the security of your smartphone.
The longer the passkey, the more difficult it
is for the passkey to be deciphered.
4
Select Trusted Devices.
8
9
Enter the same passkey number on
your computer when prompted.
Select Done, and then select Done
again to return to the Bluetooth screen.
B R O A D B A N D A C C E S S C O N N E C T
127
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
When you configure a headset as
Connections with
Bluetooth® devices
hands-free device, the headset is
automatically added to your trusted device
list. Follow the steps in this section to add
other devices to your trusted device list,
such as a friend’s handheld.
With your smartphone’s built-in Bluetooth
wireless technology, you can connect to a
number of Bluetooth devices, such as a
headset, car kit, printer, or GPS receiver, as
well as to other smartphones and
handhelds that are equipped with
Bluetooth wireless technology. If your
computer is enabled with Bluetooth
wireless technology, you can also
synchronize wirelessly or use your phone
as a wireless modem.
DID YOU KNOW? Your Treo smartphone does not
support wireless connections to Bluetooth
keyboards and stereo headphones.
Requesting a connection with another
Bluetooth device
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth
Select Bluetooth On.
and select
.
You can create a list of Bluetooth devices
that you trust to communicate with your
Treo smartphone. When communicating
with trusted devices, your Treo smartphone
skips the discovery process and creates a
secure link as long as the device is within
range. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet (10
meters) depending on environmental
conditions, including obstacles, radio
interference from nearby electronic
2
equipment, and other factors.
C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® D E V I C E S
128
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your smartphone when it is
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
to receive a connection request (see the
device’s documentation), and then
select Find More on your smartphone
to search again.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to recreate any
partnerships you already created.
9
Enter the same passkey on your
smartphone and on the Bluetooth
device, and select OK.
IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices
have a preset passkey; if so, you can find
the passkey in the documentation for that
device. Other devices provide a screen
where you enter a passkey that you make
up. In either case, you must use the same
passkey on both your smartphone and the
other Bluetooth device. We recommend
that where possible, you make up a
4
5
Select Setup Devices.
Select Trusted Devices.
passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters
(letters and numerals only) to improve the
security of your smartphone. The longer
the passkey, the more difficult it is for the
passkey to be deciphered.
6
Select Add Device. The discovery icon
appears, indicating that the discovery
process is active.
10 Select Done.
7
8
Select the Show pick list and select
Nearby devices.
If the device you want to add doesn’t
appear on the discovery results list,
make sure that the other device is ready
C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® D E V I C E S
129
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
Accepting a connection from another
Bluetooth device
4
Select the Visibility pick list and select
one of the following:
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that
are not on your Trusted Device list to
request a connection with your
smartphone. Your smartphone remains
accessible to other devices until you
turn this option off. After you’re done
using this setting, remember to change
it back to Hidden.
TIP For the smartphone to be visible to
Bluetooth devices, the Bluetooth setting must
be set to On and visibility must be set to
Visible or Temporary.
1
2
Press Applications
Bluetooth
Select Bluetooth On.
and select
.
TIP Use the Visible option only when you need
your smartphone to be accessible for an
extended period of time. For short term
accessibility, use the Temporary option.
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices
that are not on your Trusted Device list
to request a connection with your
smartphone during the next two
minutes. Your smartphone reverts to
the Hidden setting and becomes
inaccessible to other devices after two
minutes.
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your smartphone when it is
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to recreate any
partnerships you already created.
Hidden: Allows only devices with which
you have previously formed a
partnership to request a connection
C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® D E V I C E S
130
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
with your smartphone. New devices
cannot request a connection.
other Bluetooth device. We recommend
that where possible, you make up a
passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters
(letters and numerals only) to improve the
security of your smartphone. The longer
the passkey, the more difficult it is for the
passkey to be deciphered.
5
Enter the same passkey on your
smartphone and on the Bluetooth
device.
IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices,
such as headsets and GPS receivers, have
a preset passkey; if so, you can find the
passkey in the documentation for that
device. Other devices provide a screen
where you enter a passkey that you make
up. In either case, you must use the same
passkey on both your smartphone and the
6
(Optional) Check the Add to trusted
device list box if you want to form a
partnership with the requesting device.
7
Select OK.
C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® D E V I C E S
131
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® D E V I C E S
132
CHAPTER
6
Your photos, videos, and
music
Do you have a wallet bulging with photos of friends, family, pets,
and your most recent vacation? Are you tired of carrying both your
MP3 player and your phone?
Your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone solves both problems. You can
keep your favorite photos right on your smartphone—videos, too.
And there's no need to carry an expensive MP3 player; you can
play music on your smartphone. Simply transfer songs onto your
smartphone or an expansion card (sold separately) and then listen
through the included stereo headphones.
Benefits
•
Never be far from your favorite
people, places, and songs
•
No separate photo viewer, MP3,
CD, or mini-disc player required
•
Arrange your photos, videos, and
songs
133
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
Taking a picture
Camera and
Camcorder
You can store pictures on your smartphone
or on an expansion card.
1
Press Applications
Camera
and select
.
Your smartphone comes with an
easy-to-use, built-in, 1.3-megapixel camera
with 2x digital zoom (camera version only).
You can use the camera to take and view
pictures and videos and send them to your
friends and family. To add a personal touch
to your smartphone, use your pictures as
your wallpaper in the Phone application’s
Main View, and as caller ID images.
2
By default, the Camera application
stores pictures you take in the PALM
folder on your smartphone. To store a
picture in a different location, select one
of the following from the pick list:
<Album name>: Stores the picture in
the selected album. The storage
location is based on the location of the
album (smartphone or expansion card).
If your smartphone doesn’t have a built-in
camera, the sections in this chapter about
taking pictures and videos don’t apply to
you. But you can still receive and view
pictures and videos, send pictures and
videos to other people as email
attachments or multimedia messages
(MMS), and use pictures to personalize
your smartphone (such as wallpaper or
pictures and videos to a computer by
synchronizing your smartphone with your
computer.
New Albums: Opens a dialog box
where you can enter an album name
and select the storage location
(smartphone or expansion card).
C A M E R A A N D C A M C O R D E R
135
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
Saves the picture in the location
you selected in step 2.
TIP The camera defaults to 1.3 megapixel
(1280 x 1024) resolution. The camera also
supports VGA (640 x 480) and QVGA (320 x
240) resolution. To view these settings before
you take a picture, press Menu.
Deletes the picture.
Opens an MMS message, so
you can send the picture to a
phone number or email address
that supports picture messages.
3
4
Find your subject in the screen on your
smartphone. (The lens is on the back of
your smartphone.)
Lets you add a voice caption.
(Optional) To get a close-up of your
subject, press Up
to select 2x. Press
Down
to return to 1x.
5
6
Press Center
to capture the picture.
TIP To add an audio caption later, open the
picture and then select Audio Caption from
the Photo menu.
Do any of the following:
DID YOU KNOW? You can personalize a picture.
Open the Photo menu, select Draw on, and
then use the drawing tools to add your own
personal touch. When you save the picture,
you can replace the original or save a copy.
Recording a video
You can store videos on your smartphone
or on an expansion card.
1
Press Applications
Camcorder
and select
.
C A M E R A A N D C A M C O R D E R
136
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
New Albums: Opens a dialog box
where you can enter an album name
and select the storage location
(smartphone or expansion card).
TIP The video recording screen displays the
approximate recording time you have left
based on the space available on your
smartphone or expansion card. Actual
recording time may vary depending on how
fast you are moving, how many colors you are
recording, and so on.
TIP The camcorder defaults to CIF (352 x 288)
resolution and also supports QCIF (176 x 144)
resolution. To view these settings before you
capture a video, press Menu.
2
By default, the Camcorder application
stores videos you record in the PALM
folder on your smartphone. To store a
video in a different location, select one
of the following:
3
Find your subject in the screen on your
smartphone. (The lens is on the back of
your smartphone.)
4
5
Press Center
After you finish recording, press
Center again to stop.
Select any of the following:
to start recording.
<Album name>: Stores the video in the
selected album. The storage location is
based on the location of the album
(smartphone or expansion card).
6
C A M E R A A N D C A M C O R D E R
137
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
appears. If you are in Camcorder View,
the Video Settings screen appears.
Plays the video, so you can
review it.
3
Set any of the following preferences:
Saves the video in the location
you selected in step 2.
Effects: Sets the color palette for the
current picture or video. You cannot
change an item’s palette after you take
the picture or video.
Deletes the video.
Opens an MMS message, so you
can send the video to a phone
number or email address that
supports video messages.
Prompt sound: (Pictures only) Sets the
sound that plays before you take
the picture.
Opens a dialog box where you
can adjust the volume during
playback.
Shutter sound: Determines whether a
sound plays when you take a picture or
video.
Microphone: (Videos only) Turns the
microphone on and off so that you can
record videos with or without sound.
TIP During playback, tap and drag the
progress indicator bar to jump to a different
section of the video. Select Pause to pause
video playback.
Resolution: Sets the default size for
newly captured pictures or videos.
Date stamp: (Pictures only) Determines
whether the date the picture is taken
appears on your pictures.
Customizing your Camera settings
You can customize the built-in camera’s
settings for your Treo 755P smartphone.
Review photos/videos: Determines
whether you can review pictures or
videos before saving them and how
quickly they are automatically saved.
1
2
Go to Camera View or Camcorder View.
Press Menu . If you are in Camera
View, the Photo Settings screen
C A M E R A A N D C A M C O R D E R
138
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
Auto naming: Assigns a name to a
series of pictures or videos to be
captured, such as Seattle001,
Seattle002, and so on.
Pics & Videos
Viewing a picture
In addition to viewing the pictures you
capture with the built-in camera, you can
view pictures captured on many popular
digital cameras or downloaded from the
Internet. Your smartphone supports the
following picture formats:
•
•
•
•
1
JPG
TIF
BMP
GIF
Press Applications
and select
Pics&Videos
.
2
Select the album that contains the
picture you want to see.
TIP To view an album from an expansion card,
insert the card and select the album from the
Album list. If the items on the card are not
grouped into albums, select the card name
from the list.
4
Select Done.
3
Select the picture you want to view.
P I C S
&
V I D E O S
139
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
4
Press Right or Left to scroll to the
next item in the album.
•
•
•
MPG
M4V
ASF (with MPEG-4 video and
IMA-ADPCM audio)
DID YOU KNOW? To see the outer edges of a
picture that may not be visible, use the stylus
to tap and drag the picture in any direction.
•
AVI (with MJPEG video and PCM audio)
1
Press Applications
Pics&Videos
and select
5
6
If the picture has a voice caption, select
to hear it.
.
2
3
4
Select the album that contains the video
you want to see.
Tap the picture or press Center
to
return to Thumbnail View.
Select the video you want to view.
Playback begins automatically.
TIP In Thumbnail View, you can group photos
or videos to more easily locate them. Select
one of the grouping options from the View
menu.
Hold down Right or Left to seek
within the current video, or press Right
or Left to scroll to the next item in
the album.
Viewing a video
5
Press Center
to return to
In addition to viewing the videos you
capture with the built-in camera, you can
view videos captured on many popular
digital cameras. Your smartphone supports
the following types of video files:
Thumbnail View.
DID YOU KNOW? If you pause video playback
and then close the video, the video starts
where you left off the next time you play it.
•
•
3GP
3G2 (MPEG-4 video + QCELP audio +
.3g2 file type)
•
MP4
P I C S
&
V I D E O S
140
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
Viewing a slide show
1
From the Album list, select the album
that contains the picture(s) or video(s)
you want to send.
1
2
3
Press Applications
Pics&Videos
and select
.
2
3
Tap
in the lower-right corner of the
Highlight (or open) the album you want
to view.
screen.
Select the pictures or videos to send, or
select Select All to send the entire
album.
(Optional) Press Menu
, select
Options, and then select Auto-hide
Toolbar Off if you want to see the
toolbar.
NOTE A + sign appears next to selected
4
5
Press Space
show.
to start the slide
items.
Press Center
previous view.
to return to the
DID YOU KNOW? You cannot send copyrighted
pictures or videos that appear with a Lock icon
in Thumbnail View or Picture list.
TIP To set slide show options such as
background music and transitions, open the
Options menu and select Slideshow
4
Select Share.
Setting. Keep in mind that background music
overrides audio captions when you’re running
a slide show. Background music for a slide
show also overrides any music that might be
playing using the Pocket Tunes application on
your smartphone if you start a slide show.
Sending pictures or videos
You can send pictures or videos to other
devices that support picture and video
messaging or to an email address.
P I C S
&
V I D E O S
141
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
4
Select the pictures or videos to copy, or
select Select All to copy the entire
album. (A + sign appears next to
selected items.)
5
6
Select Copy.
Select the Copy items to pick list and
select whether you want to copy the
selected items to your device or to an
expansion card.
5
6
(Optional) Enter any text you want to
add to the message.
+ sign indicates
a picture is
selected
Address and send the message.
message for details.)
Copying a picture or video
You can copy pictures or videos into
another album. You can also copy pictures
and videos between your smartphone and
an expansion card.
7
8
Select the Into album pick list and
select the album you want to copy the
selected items to.
1
From the Album list, select the album
that contains the picture(s) or video(s)
you want to copy.
Select Copy.
TIP You can also move pictures and videos
between albums. Open the Photo (or Video)
menu and select Move to. The remaining
steps are the same as copying pictures, but
use the Move commands instead of the Copy
commands.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Copy to from the Photo (or
Video) menu.
P I C S
&
V I D E O S
142
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
Organizing pictures and videos
Saving a picture as wallpaper
1
2
3
Open the album you want to organize.
Press Menu
You can select a picture to use as wallpaper
for the Phone application’s Main View.
.
Select Album, and then select Add to
album or Remove from album.
1
Open the picture you want to save as
wallpaper.
4
5
Select the pictures or videos to add or
remove, or select Select All to add or
remove the entire album. (A + sign
indicates that you want to add the item.
An X sign indicates that you want to
remove the item.)
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Save
as Wallpaper.
4
When the confirmation message
appears, confirm by selecting Yes or
decline by selecting No.
Select Add or Remove.
Adding a picture to a contact entry
DID YOU KNOW? You can also open the Album
list from Camera View or Camcorder View by
selecting the icon in the lower-right corner.
1
Open the picture you want to add to a
contact.
2
3
Press Menu
.
TIP Install the Palm® Files application to easily
browse and manage files on an expansion
card. Press Applications, select My Treo,
select the Bonus tab, and then select Files.
Select Options, and then select Save
as Contact.
4
Select the contact you want to add this
picture to.
TIP To change the name, add a caption, or
view other picture or video information,
highlight (or open) the item, open the Photo
(or Video) menu, and select Details.
Rotating a picture
1
2
3
4
Open the picture you want to rotate.
Press Menu
.
Select Rotate from the Photo menu.
Select the orientation.
P I C S
&
V I D E O S
143
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
Deleting a picture or video
You can view and edit synchronized
pictures and videos in the Palm Media
desktop application. Open Palm® Desktop
software and click the Media icon. For
information about using the Palm Media
desktop application, refer to the
1
Open the album that contains the
picture(s) or video(s) you want to delete.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Delete from the Photo (or
Video) menu.
Palm Desktop Online Help.
4
Select the pictures or videos that you
want to delete, or select Select All to
delete the entire album. (An X sign
appears next to selected items.)
If you want to manage photos and videos
directly from the location in which they're
stored, you can find your pictures and
videos in the following locations:
5
6
Select Delete.
Windows:
Select Delete to confirm the deletion.
•
•
•
•
My Documents\ My Photos\Palm
Photos\ <user name>\Internal
TIP You can also highlight a picture or video in
Thumbnail View, and then press Backspace
to delete the highlighted item.
My Documents\ My Photos\Palm
Photos\ <user name>\Expansion Card
My Documents\ My Videos\Palm
Videos\ <user name>\Internal
Viewing pictures and videos on your
computer
My Documents\ My Videos\Palm
Videos\<user name>\Expansion Card
When you synchronize your Treo 755P
smartphone, your pictures and videos are
copied to your desktop computer. You can
view pictures in JPEG format and videos in
MPEG-4 format (3G2 file extension). You
can email them to friends using your
desktop email application.
Mac:
Mac HD : Users : <Mac user name> :
•
Pictures : Palm Photos : <Palm device
name> : Internal
P I C S
&
V I D E O S
144
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
•
•
•
Mac HD : Users : <Mac user name> :
Pictures : Palm Photos : <Palm device
name> : Expansion Card
card. After you transfer the music files, you
can play them using the Pocket Tunes
application on your smartphone.
™
Mac HD : Users : <Mac user name> :
Movies : Palm Videos : <Palm device
name> : Internal
TIP You can upgrade Pocket Tunes to a version
that supports more music file formats (such
as WMA), supports subscription music, and
includes additional features. For more info,
Mac HD : Users : <Mac user name> :
Movies : Palm Videos : <Palm device
name> : Expansion Card
DID YOU KNOW? If a call comes in when you’re
listening to music, you can take the call and
the music pauses automatically. After you
finish the call, the music starts again.
™
Pocket Tunes
Setting up Windows Media Player for
MP3
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Mac You need an
expansion card (sold separately) to listen to
music on your smartphone. You cannot
transfer MP3 files from your Mac directly
onto your smartphone.
On a Windows computer, you need to set
Windows Media Player to save your music
files in MP3 format in order for the files to
be compatible with Pocket Tunes.
You can listen to music through the
1
Connect your smartphone to your
computer with the sync cable.
speaker on the back of your smartphone or
through the included stereo headphones.
To listen to music on your smartphone, you
need to convert the music files into MP3
format using Windows Media Player
(Windows computers) or iTunes (Mac
computers), and then transfer the music
files to your smartphone or an expansion
2
On your smartphone, press
Applications
pTunes
and select
.
3
On your computer, open Windows
Media Player, and then click the
P O C K E T T U N E S ™
145
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
full-screen icon in the upper-right corner
to maximize the window.
4
5
Click Tools, and then click Options.
Uncheck
box
Click the Rip Music tab, click the
Format pick list, and then select mp3.
Click OK.
6
7
Click Tools, and then click Options.
Click the Devices tab, select Palm
Handheld from the Devices list, and
then click Properties.
9
Click OK, and then click OK again.
You now have set up Windows Media
Player to transfer MP3 files to the Pocket
Tunes application on your smartphone.
Select your
smartphone
Setting up iTunes for MP3
On a Mac, use iTunes (included with OS X)
to convert music from a CD to MP3 format.
For more information on using the iTunes
software, see the documentation that
came with your Mac.
Click
Properties
8
Click the Quality tab, uncheck the
Convert files as required by this
handheld (recommended) box. Click
Apply.
1
2
3
On your Mac, open iTunes.
Select Preferences.
Click the Advanced button at the top of
the window, and then click Importing.
P O C K E T T U N E S ™
146
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
4
5
Click the Import Using pop-up menu
and select MP3 Encoder.
1
2
Connect your smartphone to your
computer with the USB sync cable.
(Optional) Click the Setting pop-up
On your smartphone, press
menu and select Good Quality.
Applications
pTunes
and select
.
TIP Mac If you want greater control over the
file size and sound quality of your MP3 files,
select Custom from the Setting pop-up
menu.
3
4
If you are transferring MP3 files from a
Mac, insert an expansion card into your
smartphone. This step is optional for
Windows users.
Do one of the following:
Transferring MP3 files from your computer
The Pocket Tunes software that comes
with your smartphone is compatible with
the popular MP3 audio file format. If your
MP3 files are already on your computer’s
hard drive, you need to transfer them to
your smartphone to listen to them on your
smartphone.
WINDOWS ONLY Open Windows Media
Player on your computer. Select the Sync
tab, and then select Palm Handheld from
the drop-down list. Select Start Sync. The
files are transferred to your smartphone.
If an expansion card is inserted into the
smartphone, Windows Media Player
copies the MP3 files to the expansion card.
If you don’t have an expansion card
inserted, the MP3 files are copied to your
smartphone’s memory.
NOTE Do not press the sync button on
your cable. Windows Media Player
transfers the files, so there’s no need to do
anything.
IMPORTANT You must synchronize your
smartphone with your computer at least
once before you can transfer MP3 files
from your computer.
MAC ONLY Drag and drop the MP3 files
onto the Send To Handheld droplet in the
Palm folder. Select your device name, the
P O C K E T T U N E S ™
147
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
file name, and the destination (card). Click
OK. Synchronize your smartphone with
your computer. Be patient; transferring
music to an expansion card can take
several minutes.
4
Select the tracks you want to convert to
MP3.
5
6
Select Rip Music.
Transfer the MP3 files to your
DID YOU KNOW? You can also use a card reader
accessory (sold separately) to transfer MP3
files from your computer to your expansion
card. Create a Music_Audio folder in the root
directory of the card, and store your MP3 files
in this folder.
MAC ONLY
1
2
On your Mac, open iTunes.
Insert the music CD into the CD drive
on your Mac.
3
4
5
Check the boxes next to the tracks you
want to convert to MP3.
Transferring music from a CD to your
smartphone
Click the Import button in the
upper-right corner of the iTunes window.
If your songs are on a CD and you want to
listen to them on your smartphone, you
need to convert them to MP3 format on
your computer before you transfer the files
to your smartphone.
When the songs are finished importing,
click the Eject Disk button in the
lower-right corner of the iTunes window.
6
Transfer the MP3 files to your
WINDOWS ONLY
1
2
3
On your computer, open Windows
Media Player.
Listening to music on your Treo
smartphone
Insert the music CD into your
computer’s CD drive.
CAUTION Protect your hearing. Listening
to this device at full volume for a long
period of time can damage your hearing.
Select the Rip tab.
P O C K E T T U N E S ™
148
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
1
2
Make sure the Ringer switch is set to
for more information.
DID YOU KNOW? You can also press Space to
pause and resume playback, as well as use
the 5-way to navigate among songs or pause
and resume playback.
Press Applications
and select
pTunes
.
TIP You can change the settings on your
smartphone so that pressing and holding the
Side button opens Pocket Tunes. See
Reassigning buttons for details.
Progress
indicator
Play/Pause
Choose
Song
Previous
song
3
Do any of the following:
• To play or resume playback of the
current song, select Play
• To play the next song, select Next
Song
• To play the previous song, select
Previous Song
• To play a different song, select
.
Next song
Volume
.
Pocket Tunes continues playing until it
reaches the end of your list or until you
select Pause
. Music continues to play
.
even if you switch to another application or
turn off your screen. If you want to stop
playing music when you exit Pocket Tunes,
, select Background Prefs
from the Prefs menu, uncheck the Enable
Choose Song
and select a
song from the list.
press Menu
• To adjust the volume during playback,
press the Volume button on the side
of your smartphone.
background play box, and then select OK.
• To pause playback select Pause
.
P O C K E T T U N E S ™
149
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
Creating a playlist
Editing a playlist
If you want to play a group of songs in a
particular order, you can create a playlist.
1
Press Applications
pTunes
Press Menu
and select
.
2
3
.
1
Press Applications
pTunes
Press Menu
and select
.
Select Actions, and then select
Manage Playlists.
2
3
.
4
5
Highlight a playlist, and then select Edit.
Select Actions, and then select
Manage Playlists.
Do any of the following:
4
5
Select New, and then enter a name for
the playlist.
• To delete a song from the playlist,
select the song and then select
Remove.
Select Add Song. Select the songs you
want to include on the playlist.
• To add a song, select Add Song,
check a song’s box, and then
select Done.
• To move a song up or down one slot,
select a song and then select Up or
Down.
6
Select Save List.
TIP To delete a playlist, select Manage
Playlists from the Actions menu, select the
playlist, and then select Delete List. Select
Yes to confirm the deletion.
6
Select Save List.
TIP To play songs from a playlist, open Pocket
Tunes, select Choose Songs, and then select
Playlists. Select the playlist you want to play,
and then select All.
P O C K E T T U N E S ™
150
CHAPTER
7
Your personal information
organizer
Say good-bye to paper calendars and throw away those
scribbled to-do lists. Your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone is all
you need to organize your personal information and keep it with
you wherever you go.
You never lose your information, even if your battery is
completely drained. All of your personal info is backed up each
time you synchronize, and your info is kept private when you
use the security features on your smartphone. Also, you can
easily share info with others electronically.
Benefits
•
Track current, future, and past
appointments
•
•
Set reminders for appointments,
birthdays, important tasks, and
more
•
Make to-do lists that get done
Before you call your friend in
London, check the time first
151
In this chapter
Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Calendar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
1
2
Press Phone
.
Contacts
Select the Contacts favorite button.
Contacts is where you enter information
about people you know. You can access
this info from the Phone application to dial
phone numbers and create favorites, and
from the Messaging and email applications
to send messages. When you create a
contact, you can also assign a photo and
ringtone ID to that contact, so you know
when they call you.
TIP You can also open Contacts from
Applications View. Press Applications and
select Contacts.
3
4
Select New Contact.
Use the 5-way
to move between
fields as you enter information.
DID YOU KNOW? If your company uses
Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you
may be able to sync Contacts directly with the
server. See Working with Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync for info.
Adding a contact
5
(Optional) Do any of the following:
TIP If you have several contacts to enter, it’s
more efficient to use the Palm® Desktop
software (included) or Microsoft Outlook®
(sold separately) on your computer and then
sync your smartphone with your computer.
For more info see Synchronizing information—
Add a caller ID photo: Select the
Picture box, and then do one of the
following:
• Select Camera to take a picture and
add it to this contact when you
save the picture.
C O N T A C T S
153
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
• Select Photos to add an existing
Viewing or changing contact information
picture to this contact.
1
In the Contacts list, begin entering one
of the following for the contact you
want to view or edit:
Add a caller ID ringtone: Select the
Ringtone pick list and select a ringtone
from the list to give incoming calls from
this contact a distinctive ring.
• First name (JOH for John)
• Last name (SMI for Smith)
Place the entry in a category or mark
with private entries for more info.)
• First initial and last name (JSM for
John Smith)
2
3
Select the name of the entry you want
to open.
Add a note to an entry: Select Note
.
Do one of the following:
Display additional fields for this
• Select Edit, make changes to the
entry as necessary, and then select
Done.
contact: Select Plus
.
6
After you enter all the information,
• Select Map, wait for Google Maps to
locate matching items. Select an item,
select To to request directions to this
location. In the From location field,
enter or select your starting location,
and then select OK. When the route
summary appears, select OK to view
the first step in the directions. Tap the
select Done.
TIP You can assign a ringtone to an entire
category of contacts. For example, use a
special ringtone for categories such as Family,
Work, or Golf Buddies. Select the category
pick list in the upper-right corner, select Edit
Categories, and then select the category.
Select the ringtone on the Edit Category
screen.
forward
and back
buttons at the bottom of the screen to
view the next or previous step in the
directions.
C O N T A C T S
154
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
• Select Map, wait for Google Maps to
locate matching items. Select an item,
Select From to request directions
from this location. In the To location
field, enter or select your destination,
and then select OK. When the route
summary appears, select OK to view
the first step in the directions. Tap the
3
4
Press Menu
.
Select Business Card from the Record
menu.
TIP After you define your business card, you
can beam it to other Palm OS® devices. In any
Phone view or the Contacts application, open
the Record menu and select Beam Business
Card.
forward
and back
buttons at the bottom of the screen to
view the next or previous step in the
directions.
Calendar
TIP In the Contacts list, press Up or Down on
the 5-way to move to the previous or next
Contacts record.
Calendar is a powerful organizer application
that helps you manage your schedule. You
can view your calendar by day, week, or
month, or as an agenda list that combines
your Tasks list and email notifications with
your appointments. Schedule repeating
meetings or block out a vacation by
creating one event set to repeat at an
interval you specify. Color-code your
appointments by category and add notes
with helpful information.
Deleting a contact
1
2
3
Open the contact you want to delete.
Press Menu
.
Select Delete Contact from the Record
menu, and then select OK.
Defining your business card
1
Create a new contact and enter your
own business card info.
2
Open the contact entry containing your
business card info.
C A L E N D A R
155
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
Week View: Shows your schedule for
an entire week. The time frames are
based on the Start Time and End Time
settings in Calendar Preferences.
DID YOU KNOW? If your company uses
Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you
may be able to synchronize Calendar events
directly with the server. See Working with
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for details.
Month View: Shows your schedule for
a whole month.
Displaying your calendar
•
•
From any Calendar view, open the
Options menu and select Year View to
view a calendar for an entire year.
•
Press Calendar
repeatedly to
cycle through the various views:
Agenda View: Shows your daily
schedule, the number of unread email
messages, and any items on your Tasks
list that are overdue or due today. If
there’s room, Agenda View also lists
events on future dates.
From any Calendar view (except Agenda
View), use the 5-way
to go to
another day, week, month, or year
(based on the current view).
•
From any Calendar view (except Agenda
View), select Go To, and then select a
date from the calendar.
Day View: Shows your daily schedule
one day at a time.
TIP You can customize your smartphone to
display the most current Calendar event in the
Phone application’s Main View. Press Phone,
open the Options menu, and then select
Phone Display Options. Check the Show
Calendar event box.
C A L E N D A R
156
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
Creating an event
6
(Optional) To assign a time zone to the
event, select the Time Zone pick list
and select a city in the time zone you
want.
TIP If you have several appointments to enter,
it’s more efficient to use Palm Desktop
software (included) or Microsoft Outlook (sold
separately) on your computer and then
synchronize your smartphone with your
computer. For more information, see
7
8
Select OK.
Enter a description for the event.
IMPORTANT If you use Palm Desktop
software, do not add time zones to your
events. Palm Desktop does not support
time zones.
1
2
Press Calendar
appears.
until Day View
Press Left or Right to select the
If you use Microsoft Outlook, you can use
the time zone feature, but you must install
the conduit from the Palm Software
Installation CD that came with your Treo
755P smartphone (or a subsequent update)
on all the computers with which you sync
your smartphone. Chapura PocketMirror
and other earlier Microsoft Outlook
desired day.
Selected
date
Selected
day
conduits do not support time zones.
3
4
Select New.
Using the keyboard, enter a starting
hour and minute for the event, such as
545 for 5:45.
5
Select the End Time box and enter the
ending hour and minute for the event.
C A L E N D A R
157
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
4
Select OK.
TIP To automatically assign a time zone to
your events, open the Options menu, select
Preferences, and check the New events use
time zones box. All your new events will be
assigned to your local time zone (existing
events aren’t affected), and you can change
the time zone setting for individual events.
Type of time
units
Number of
time units
TIP If you want your events with time zones to
stay at the same time in Calendar, regardless
of the time zone you are in, go to Date & Time
Preferences, select the Automatically Set
pick list, and select Date and time. If you
select Date, time and time zone, the event
time shifts if you travel to a different time
information.
DID YOU KNOW? When an alarm occurs, the
Alert screen displays all your pending alerts.
Select an alert description to jump to that
item, or check the box to clear that alert.
Creating an untimed event
Adding an alarm to an event
An untimed event, such as a holiday or
deadline, does not occur at a particular
time.
1
2
3
In Calendar, select the event.
Select Details.
Check the Alarm box and select the
number of minutes, hours, or days
before the event that you would like to
receive the alarm.
1
2
3
Press Calendar
Day View.
until you are in
Press Left or Right to go to the
date of the event.
Make sure no times are highlighted.
TIP The alarm for untimed events is defined by
minutes, days, or hours before midnight of
the date of the event.
C A L E N D A R
158
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
4
Enter a description for the event.
A diamond appears next to the
description of an untimed event.
select Other to define a custom
interval.
4
Select OK.
Scheduling a repeating event
This icon
indicates a
repeating
event.
TIP To enter a birthday or anniversary, add this
info to the person’s Contacts entry and it
automatically appears in your Calendar.
TIP To enter a holiday, create an untimed
event. Then, from the Details screen, select
Every year as the repeat interval.
1
2
3
Create an event, and then select it.
DID YOU KNOW? If you sync with Microsoft
Outlook and your events include other people,
a With field appears in the Details dialog box
and your attendee info appears in this field
after you sync.
Select Details.
Select the Repeat pick list, and then
select a repeat interval. If the interval
you need doesn’t appear on the list,
C A L E N D A R
159
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
Color-coding your schedule
Editing or deleting an event
Use color-coding to quickly spot various
types of events. For example, make
appointments with family green,
coworkers blue, and friends red. Follow
these steps to create a category and
assign it a color-code.
1
Select the event you want to edit or
delete.
2
3
Select Details.
In addition to the settings covered
earlier in this chapter, you can also
change any of the following settings:
1
From Day View, select an event
description or select an empty timeslot.
Date and Time: Displays when the
event takes place. Change these
settings to reschedule the event.
2
3
Select Details.
Select the Category pick list and select
Edit Categories.
Location: Provides a description of
where the event takes place.
4
Do one of the following:
Category: Sets the color-coded
category for this event.
• To create a new category, select New
and then enter a category name.
Note
: Provides space for you to
• To add a color to an existing category,
select a category and select Edit.
enter additional text.
Delete: Removes the event from your
calendar.
5
6
7
Select the color you want to give this
category, and then select OK.
(Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add
or edit more categories.
4
Select OK.
TIP To save memory, you can purge your old
events. Open the Record menu and select
Purge. Select the Delete events older than
pick list and select a time frame. Select OK.
Select OK two more times.
Now that the categories are set up with
colors, you can assign categories to your
events to color-code them. See the next
section for details.
C A L E N D A R
160
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
Customizing display options for your
calendar
the Background box, select the image
placeholder, and then select a photo.
Adjust the fade setting so that the text
is easy to read against the photo.
1
2
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Display Options.
5
Select Day and set any of the following
Day View options:
3
4
Select the Default View pick list and
select the view you want to see when
you open Calendar.
Select Agenda and set any of the
following options:
Show Category List: The Category
pick list appears in Day View.
Show Time Bars: The time bars appear
in Day View to show the duration of an
event and to illustrate event conflicts.
Show Due Tasks: The tasks that are
due today and the tasks that are
overdue appear in Agenda View.
Compress Day View: When this box is
unchecked, all time slots appear on the
screen. When this box is checked, start
and end times appear for each event,
but blank time slots near the bottom of
the screen disappear to minimize
scrolling.
Show Messages: The number of read
and unread email messages displays in
Agenda View.
Background: A favorite photo becomes
the Agenda View background. Check
C A L E N D A R
161
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
Show Category Column: The
7
Select OK.
color-coded category marker appears
between the time and the description to Selecting alarm tones
indicate the category under which the
event is filed.
1
2
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Sound
6
Select Month and set any of the
Preferences.
following Month View options:
3
4
5
Select the Application pick list and
select Calendar.
Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
Select the Vibrate pick list and select an
option for how you want your
smartphone to vibrate for an event
alarm.
6
Select tones from any of the following
pick lists:
Show Category List: The Category pick
list appears in Month View.
Timed Events: The events that are
scheduled for a specific time appear in
Month View.
Untimed Events: The events that are
scheduled for a specific date but not a
specific time appear in Month View.
Daily Repeating Events: The events
that repeat every day appear in Month
View.
Alarm Sound: The tone played the first
time your alarm goes off.
C A L E N D A R
162
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
Reminder Sound: The tone played if an
alarm is not acknowledged and
the alarm repeats itself.
World Clock
World Clock displays the day and time in
three cities anywhere around the globe.
Whether you’re traveling or staying home,
it’s easy to keep track of the best time to
reach your business associates, friends,
and family in faraway places.
Repeat: The number of times the alarm
repeats itself if the alarm is not
acknowledged.
Default Alarm: The default timeframe
for the alarm field.
7
Select Done.
TIP If you did not select the option to get the
date and time from the mobile network, then
you can set the city at the top of the screen to
a fixed location.
TIP You can also record sounds and use them
as alarms. Select Manage on the Sound &
Alerts Preferences screen.
•
•
To record a sound, select New.
To play a sound, select it and press Center
Selecting cities
on the 5-way.
To delete a sound, select it and press
Backspace.
To send a sound, select it and then select
World Clock shows the system date and
time above the world map. If you selected
the option to get the date and time from
the mobile network (see Setting the date
and time), the Verizon Wireless network
automatically updates the time display to
match the local time when you travel.
•
•
Send.
DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a
silent alarm that can vibrate even when the
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off (see
Below the world map you can view the
time in two other cities. If you travel a lot,
you may want to select your home city as
one of these two cities, so that you always
know what time it is at home.
W O R L D C L O C K
163
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
1
2
Press Applications
World Clock
and select
1
Select a City pick list and select Edit
List.
.
Select a City pick list, and select a city
in the same time zone as the city you
want to track.
2
3
Select Add.
Select a location in the same time zone
as the city you want to add, and then
select OK.
4
5
Enter the name of the city.
Select Location, select Map, select the
location of the city, and then select OK.
6
If the city does not observe Daylight
Savings Time, uncheck this box. If
Daylight Savings Time is observed,
enter Start and End dates.
7
Select OK.
DID YOU KNOW? You can run your stylus over
the map to see the time in other cities. The
shadow over the map represents nighttime
moving across the globe.
Setting an alarm
The next time you travel, don’t rely on a
hotel alarm clock to get you to that
important meeting. Use your smartphone
instead. World Clock includes a built-in
alarm feature that you can use as a travel
alarm.
TIP World Clock does not automatically update
the system time for daylight savings time. To
change the Daylight Savings Time setting,
1
2
Select Off in the upper-right corner.
Adding cities
Select the time you want the alarm to
sound.
If the city you want to display is not in the
predefined list, you can add it.
3
Select OK.
W O R L D C L O C K
164
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
3
Enter a description of the task. The text
can be longer than one line.
TIP To customize the alarm sound and
volume, open the Options menu and select
Alarm Preferences.
Setting task priority, due date, and other
details
TIP Make sure the Ringer switch is set to
Sound On, so that you can hear the alarm.
The Details dialog box enables you to
assign a priority level, due date, category,
privacy flag, and other details for each task.
Tasks
1
Select the task to which you want to
assign details.
You can use Tasks to remind you of tasks
you need to complete and to keep a record
of when you finish tasks.
2
3
Select Details.
Set any of the following:
Priority: Select the priority number for
this task (1 is most important). Later
you can arrange your tasks based on the
importance of each task.
Adding a task
1
Press Applications
Tasks
Select New to create a new task.
and select
.
2
TIP You can also select the priority from the
Tasks list by selecting the number next to a
task and then selecting a priority level.
T A S K S
165
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
Private: Check this box to mark this
task private. See Working with private
entries for additional information.
: Select this button to enter
additional text that you want to
associate with the task.
4
Select OK.
Category: Assign the task to a specific
category. To add a new category, select
Edit Categories and then select New.
TIP Press Menu to access other features such
as importing phone numbers into the Tasks
list.
Due Date: Select the Due Date pick list
and select a due date for the task.
Checking off a task
1
2
Select the task you want to check off.
TIP If you turn on the Show Due Dates option
in the Tasks Preferences screen, you can
change the due date later by selecting the
task’s due date in the Tasks list.
Press Center
or tap the box to
check off the task.
Alarm: Set an alarm for this task.
Repeat: Indicate whether the task
occurs at regular intervals and how
often it repeats. When you check off a
repeating task, the next instance of this
task automatically appears in your task
list.
T A S K S
166
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7 Days, or
Past Due.
TIP If you accidentally check off a task and
need to uncheck it, highlight the task again
and press Center on the 5-way to uncheck it.
TIP You can set Tasks to record the date that
you completed a task, and you can select to
show or hide completed tasks. Completed
tasks remain in the memory of your
smartphone until you purge them.
DID YOU KNOW? Overdue tasks have an
exclamation point (!) next to the due date.
Organizing your tasks
•
Category: Displays tasks that are
assigned to the selected category.
Select the Category pick list to select a
different category.
In the Tasks list, select one of these
options:
•
All: Displays all your tasks.
•
Date: Displays tasks that are due in a
specific time frame. Select the Date
pick list (in the title bar) to select Due
T A S K S
167
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
Deleting a task
3
Set any of the following preferences:
1
2
3
Select the task you want to delete.
Press Menu
Sort by: Indicates the order in which
your tasks appear in the list.
.
Select Delete Task from the Record
Show Completed Tasks: Displays
menu.
tasks you’ve checked off.
4
Select OK.
Record Completion Date: Replaces
due date with the completion date
when you complete (check off) the task.
TIP To save memory, you can purge all
completed tasks. Open the Record menu and
select Purge. Select OK.
Show Due Dates: Displays task due
dates and inserts an exclamation point
(!) next to overdue tasks.
Customizing Tasks
Tasks Preferences enable you to control
the appearance of the Tasks list.
Show Priorities: Displays the priority
setting for each task.
1
In the Tasks list, press Menu
.
Show Categories: Displays the
category for each task.
Alarm Sound: Sets the sound for the
alarms you assign to your tasks.
4
Select OK.
DID YOU KNOW? You can display your tasks in
your calendar. See Customizing display
options for your calendar for details.
2
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
T A S K S
168
CHAPTER
8
Your memos and documents
With its ability to store large amounts of important information,
your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone lets you take your office
with you—including your Microsoft® Office and PDF files. You
can keep updated copies of the files on both your smartphone
and your computer so that you can work on them in the most
convenient location any time.
Leave your note pad and voice recorder at home. Use Memos
to type notes. Use Voice Memo to record notes, agenda items,
and other important thoughts, and play them back, right on
your smartphone. You can even send your notes and voice
memos to a friend or colleague by attaching them to an email
or multimedia message.
Benefits
•
Manage Word, Excel®,
PowerPoint®, and PDF files on your
smartphone
•
•
Improve productivity by taking
important docs, spreadsheets, and
presentations with you
Capture thoughts on the fly
169
In this chapter
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S
8
www.dataviz.com/office2007 (additional
fees may apply).
Documents To Go®
Professional
Here are a few more examples of what you
can do with Documents:
NOTE On your smartphone, the
companion application for Documents To
Go® is named Documents.
•
•
•
Send and receive email attachments in
Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat
file formats (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).
View Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and
Adobe® Acrobat® files (DOC, XLS, PPT,
and PDF).
With the Documents application on your
smartphone, you can take your important
office info with you. You can create, view,
and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files
directly on your smartphone. You can also
view and manage PowerPoint and PDF
files. For example, you can open email
attachments, files you download with the
web browser, and files stored on an
Create or edit a Word-compatible
document or Excel-compatible
spreadsheet on your smartphone, and
then save it in the native DOC or XLS
format.
•
Create a PowerPoint presentation on
your computer, use the Documents To
Go desktop application to optimize the
file for your smartphone, and then sync
the file onto your smartphone. View or
edit the file on your smartphone, and
then sync again to transfer the changes
to the original PowerPoint file on your
computer.
expansion card (sold separately)—as long
as the files are in a supported format.
NOTE The version of Documents To Go
that comes with your smartphone does not
support Microsoft Office 2007. To access
Office 2007 files on your smartphone, you
must save the files in Office 2003 format.
For information about an upgrade that
supports Office 2007, go to
D O C U M E N T S T O G O ® P R O F E S S I O N A L
171
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S
8
NOTE The Documents application does
not support some editing functions, such
as multiple font sizes and spell checking.
Opening a document
In the Documents application, you can
view and open any Word, Excel,
PowerPoint, or Acrobat (PDF) file on your
smartphone or an expansion card that is
inserted in the expansion card slot.
Go to www.palm.com/mypalm/
755pverizon-bonus to download and install
the Documents To Go desktop software. It
enables you to synchronize Microsoft
Office files so that changes you make to
these files show up on both your
smartphone and your computer. You can
save files in their native Office format or
make use of the optimized Documents To
Go formats.
1
Press Applications
Documents
and select
.
TIP For more info on the Documents To Go
desktop application, click the Documents To
Go icon on your computer, and then click
2
Select the document you want from the
list.
TIP Download and install the Files application
to easily browse and manage files on an
expansion card. Press Applications, select
My Treo, select the Bonus tab, and then
info on installing applications.
TIP When you work on a file on your
smartphone, you can save it to your
smartphone or an expansion card. Open the
File menu, select Save As, and then select
the location where you want to save the file.
D O C U M E N T S T O G O ® P R O F E S S I O N A L
172
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S
8
Memos
TIP You can assign categories to your memos.
Open the memo you want to change, select
the category pick list at the top of the screen,
and select a category. To add a new category,
select Edit Categories and then select New.
Memos are a great way to store notes on
your Treo 755P smartphone.
DID YOU KNOW? Each memo can include 4,096
characters of text.
Deleting a memo
1
2
3
Open the memo you want to delete.
Press Menu
.
Creating a memo
Select Delete Memo from the Record
1
2
3
Press Applications
Memos
and select
menu.
.
4
Select OK.
Enter the text you want to appear in the
memo.
Select Done.
Voice Memo
Voice Memo provides a place for you to
record and play back notes and other
important thoughts directly on your
smartphone.
NOTE Voice memos are not updated or
backed up during synchronization.
M E M O S
173
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S
8
Creating a voice memo
DID YOU KNOW? You can assign the Side button
to the Voice Memo app so that you can
simply press and hold the Side button to
When recording a voice memo, face your
smartphone’s screen while speaking.
1
Press Applications
Voice Memo
and select
TIP If you need to pause while recording,
press and hold Center on the 5-way. Release
the button to resume recording.
.
2
Do either of the following:
• Press and hold the Side button on
your smartphone while recording your
memo. After you finish recording,
release the Side button.
DID YOU KNOW? Your recording pauses
automatically when you receive a call. If you
ignore the call, you can press Center on the
5-way to resume recording. If you answer the
call, recording stops and saves; you cannot
resume a previous recording; you must start
another voice memo.
• Press and release the Side button on
your smartphone. After you finish
recording, press the Side button
again.
Listening to a voice memo
The memo is automatically saved to
your smartphone.
1
Press Applications
Voice Memo
and select
.
3
(Optional) Enter a title for the voice
memo.
2
In the Voice Memo list, navigate to the
voice memo title and then press
Center
to select it. The voice
memo begins to play.
V O I C E M E M O
174
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S
8
TIP To adjust the volume level, press the
Volume button on the side of your
smartphone.
TIP To change a voice memo title, open the
Voice Memo menu and select Rename
Memo.
DID YOU KNOW? You can send a voice memo in
an email or MMS message (see the
documentation for your email application, or
You can also use Bluetooth® wireless
technology to send a voice memo to a nearby
Bluetooth device (see Sending info over a
3
Press Center
playback.
to pause or stop
V O I C E M E M O
175
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S
8
V O I C E M E M O
176
CHAPTER
9
Your application and
info management tools
Synchronization is a great way to transfer, update, and back up
info on your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone. Synchronizing
simply means that info you entered or updated in one place
(your smartphone or your computer) is automatically updated in
the other. There’s no need to enter info twice.
Expansion cards (sold separately) provide a compact and
limitless storage solution. When one card becomes full, simply
use another card to carry your extra music and video clips and
to install and run cool games and other software, from
dictionaries to travel guides.
Benefits
•
Locate info in your applications
with the Find feature
•
•
Quickly enter, update, and protect
your info on your computer and
your smartphone
•
Install applications, games, and
other software
Store, carry, and exchange info
177
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
4
In the search results, select the text you
want to review, or select Find More to
continue the search.
Using Find
The Find feature locates any text in the
built-in applications and databases and
in some third-party applications. The Find
feature searches for the group of
characters you specify, including characters
that are part of a word. Find is not
case-sensitive.
Find also includes Google Maps links that
help you find a location, business, or
directions to the word you’re searching for.
For example, to find a nearby pizza place,
enter pizza followed by a space and your
zip code, such as “pizza 95060.”
Viewing and using
the alerts
DID YOU KNOW? Find locates any word that
begins with the text you enter. For example,
entering “plan” finds “planet,” but not
“airplane.”
The Alert screen on your smartphone
shows info about incoming items such as
new email messages and Calendar events.
The Alert screen also notifies you if you
miss a phone call.
1
Press Option
, and then press Shift/
Find to open the Find dialog box.
To view the Alert screen, tap the blinking
bell
corner of any screen, or press and hold
Center when the blinking bell appears.
when it appears in the upper-left
2
3
Enter the text you want to find.
Select OK to start the search.
U S I N G F I N D
179
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
You can do any of the following:
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Advanced Mode or Basic Mode.
•
Check the box to clear an alert from the
list.
•
Select the alert to open the
corresponding application and view the
alert item (message, event, missed call,
and so on).
Basic
Mode
•
•
Select Done to close the Alert screen
and return to whatever you were doing
on your smartphone before you opened
the Alert screen. The bell continues to
blink in the upper-left corner of the
screen.
Advanced
Mode—Math
Select Clear All to delete all alerts on
the Alert screen.
Calculator
Calculator includes a basic calculator, plus
an advanced calculator with scientific,
financial, and conversion functions.
TIP In Basic Mode, you can also press Right
on the 5-way to switch to Advanced Mode.
In Advanced Mode, press Right on the 5-way
to cycle between functions, and press Left on
the 5-way to return to Basic Mode.
Switching between Basic and Advanced
Calculator Modes
DID YOU KNOW? You can tap the onscreen
number pad or use the keyboard to input
numbers.
1
Press Applications
Calc
and select
.
C A L C U L A T O R
180
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
Selecting functions in Advanced
Calculator Mode
Area: Area conversions for metric,
traditional, and English values.
1
Switch to Advanced Mode (see the
preceding procedure).
Volume: Volume conversions for metric
and English values.
2
3
Press Menu
.
4
5
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select the
type of function you want to use:
Select Pref, and then select the decimal
display format: Float, Fixed(x), Sci(x),
or Eng(x).
Math: Advanced mathematical
functions such as exponents, roots, and
logarithms.
6
7
Press Menu
.
Select Pref, and then select the number
display format: Degrees, Radians, or
Grads.
Trig: Trigonometric functions such as
sine, cosine, tangent, and variants.
Finance: Financial calculator functions
such as APR and amortization.
TIP Select Sto to store a number in one of ten
memory slots. Select Rcl to recall a stored
number.
Logic: Hexadecimal characters in
keypad, plus logic functions such as
And, Not, Or, and Xor.
TIP Select Con to access a list of
mathematical constants such as Avogadro’s
number or the speed of light.
Statistics: Statistical functions such as
sum, factorial, and random number
generator.
Installing applications
Weight/Tmp: Weight and temperature
conversions for metric and English
values.
Your smartphone comes with several
built-in and ready-to-use applications. You
can also install free bonus software, such
as business software, games, and more.
Length: Length conversions for metric
and English values.
I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S
181
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
You can install the bonus software
download the software to your computer
your smartphone. You can also download
the bonus software from www.palm.com/
mypalm/755pverizon-bonus to your
My Palm on your computer for info on
installing software that includes a desktop
component.
computer and then synchronize to install it
on your smartphone. You can also use the
web browser on your smartphone or your
computer to purchase other third-party
1
Press Applications
My Treo
Select the Bonus tab.
and select
.
2
3
®
Palm OS apps. To learn about applications
Select the Install link below the name
you can purchase for your smartphone, go
of the application you want to install.
4
Repeat step 3 to install additional
applications.
NOTE The instructions in this section tell
you how to install basic PRC (Palm OS
application) and PDB (Palm OS database)
Installing applications from the Internet
files on your Treo smartphone. Some Palm You can use the web browser on your
OS software uses an installer or wizard to smartphone to install Palm OS files (PRC or
guide you through the process. For details, PDB) directly from the Internet. When you
consult the documentation that came with download a PRC or PDB file, it is
the software.
automatically installed on your
smartphone. If a file is compressed (ZIP or
SIT files), you need to download it to your
computer and expand the file before
installing it on your smartphone.
Installing bonus software from My Treo
on your smartphone
My Treo lets you download and install
software that you can use on your
smartphone. If the software has both a
desktop component in addition to a
smartphone component, you need to
1
Open the web browser (see Viewing a
web page).
2
Go to the page that contains the link to
the application you want to download.
I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S
182
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
3
4
Press Left or Right to highlight the Palm® Desktop software on your computer
link to the file, and then press
software).
Center
to initiate the download
process.
When you download an application to your
computer, it is probably in a compressed
format such as a ZIP or SIT file. If the file is
compressed, you need to use a
Follow the onscreen instructions to
accept and install the application.
Installing bonus software from My Palm
on your computer
decompression utility on your computer,
such as WinZip or Allume Stuffit Expander,
before you install the application on your
smartphone.
1
2
3
4
On your computer, go to
www.palm.com/mypalm/
755pverizon-bonus.
1
Windows: Drag and drop
the file(s) onto the Palm
Quick Install icon on the
Windows desktop.
Follow the onscreen instructions to
download the application(s) you want to
install.
When prompted to select either Save or
Run, select Run to place the app(s) in
the install queue.
Mac: Drag and drop the file(s) onto the
Send To Device droplet in the Palm
folder.
Synchronize your smartphone with your
computer to install the application(s) on
your smartphone.
2
3
Select your device name from the User
list, and then click OK.
Synchronize your smartphone with your
computer to install the application(s) on
your Treo smartphone.
Installing other third-party applications
from a computer
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an app
from your computer to your Treo
smartphone, you must first install
I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S
183
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
Removing
applications
TIP You can open a window to select whether
to install files on your smartphone or on an
expansion card.
Windows: Double-click the Palm Quick
Install icon.
If you decide that you no longer need an
application, or you want to free up
Mac: Open the HotSync menu and select
Install Handheld files.
memory, you can remove apps from your
smartphone or an expansion card (for more
and extensions that you install; you cannot
remove the built-in apps that reside in the
ROM portion of your Treo smartphone.
TIP On a Windows computer, you can also
access Palm™ Quick Install by selecting the
Quick Install icon in Palm® Desktop software
or from the Programs folder in the Start
menu.
Getting help with third-party applications
If you encounter a problem with a
third-party application (such as an error
message), contact the application’s author
or vendor. For general troubleshooting of
third-party applications, see Third-party
DID YOU KNOW? Some applications are
factory-installed on your smartphone and
cannot be deleted. These are listed with a
Lock icon next to them.
DID YOU KNOW? Applications deleted from your
smartphone are kept on your computer in the
Archive folder of your user folder. If you’re
having trouble locating your user folder, see I
1
2
Press Applications
.
If you want to remove an application
from an expansion card, insert the card
into your smartphone.
R E M O V I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S
184
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
3
4
5
Press Menu
.
If you upgraded from a previous version
of Palm Desktop software, your Backup
subfolder may be located in the
Select Delete on the App menu.
Select the Delete From pick list and
select the location of the application you
palmOne or Handspring folder.
want to remove: Phone or Card.
2
3
If you find a PRC or PDB file for the
application you just removed, delete the
file from the Backup subfolder.
6
7
8
Select the application that you want to
remove.
Delete the file from your device again.
Select Delete, and then select Yes to
confirm deletion.
Synchronize to remove the application
from the Backup folder on your
computer.
Viewing application
info
Manually deleting applications
The Info screens display basic statistics
about the applications on your Treo
smartphone.
If an app you delete reappears on your
smartphone, you may need to manually
delete the app from your computer.
1
2
3
4
Press Applications
Press Menu
.
1
Locate your Backup subfolder on your
computer.
.
Windows: C:\Program
Files\Palm\<device name>.
Select Info on the App menu.
Select the Device pick list and select
the location of the app you want to view
info for: Phone or <card name>.
Mac: Mac
HD\Applications\Palm\Users\<device
name>.
V I E W I N G A P P L I C A T I O N I N F O
185
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
Sending information
with Bluetooth®
wireless technology
The range of Bluetooth® wireless
technology is up to 30 feet (10 meters) in
optimum environmental conditions.
Performance and range may be affected by
physical obstacles, radio interference from
nearby electronic equipment, and other
factors.
Version: The version numbers of
applications on your smartphone.
Size: The size (in kilobytes) of
applications and information on your
smartphone.
TIP Check your battery level before
Records: The number of entries in
various applications on your
smartphone.
establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection.
If the battery level is very low, you can’t make
a Bluetooth wireless connection.
5
6
Scroll to the application you want to see
info about.
Sending info over a Bluetooth wireless
connection
Select Done.
In most applications you can send an
individual entry or item such as a contact or
a picture. You can also send all the entries
in a category, such as all contacts in the
Business category.
S E N D I N G I N F O R M A T I O N W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y
186
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth
and select
6
7
Select the Send From pick list and
select the location of the app you want
to send: Phone or <card name>.
.
2
3
4
Select Bluetooth On.
Select the application you want to
transfer. You cannot send an item that
Open an application.
Select the entry or category you want to
send. You cannot send an item that has
has a lock
next to it.
8
9
Select Send.
a lock
next to it.
Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
5
6
7
8
Press Menu
.
10 Select the receiving device(s) on the
Discovery Results screen, and then
select OK.
Select Send from the leftmost menu.
Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
Select the receiving device(s) in the
Discovery Results list, and then select
OK.
11 Wait for a message to indicate that the
transfer is complete before you
continue using your smartphone.
9
Wait for a message to indicate that the
transfer is complete before you
continue using your smartphone.
Receiving info over a Bluetooth wireless
connection
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth
Select Bluetooth On.
and select
Sending an app over a Bluetooth wireless
connection
.
2
3
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth
and select
Select the Visibility pick list and select
one of the following:
.
2
3
4
5
Select Bluetooth On.
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that
are not on your Trusted Device list to
request a connection with your
smartphone. Your smartphone remains
accessible to other devices until you
Press Applications
.
Press Menu
.
Select Send from the App menu.
S E N D I N G I N F O R M A T I O N W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y
187
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
turn this option off. After you’re done
using this setting, remember to change
it back to Hidden.
5
Select Ye s to receive the information or
No to refuse it.
TIP The Device Name in the Bluetooth app is
the name other devices with Bluetooth
wireless technology see when they connect
to your smartphone. The default name is the
name you gave your device during setup. You
can change this name if you want to.
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices
that are not on your Trusted Device list
to request a connection with your
smartphone during the next two
minutes. Your smartphone reverts to
the Hidden setting and becomes
inaccessible to other devices after two
minutes.
DID YOU KNOW? When you receive an
application over a Bluetooth connection, you
can store the application on your smartphone
or send it to an expansion card inserted into
the expansion card slot.
4
Use the other device to discover your
smartphone and send information to it:
• See the other device’s documentation
to learn how to discover and send
information over a Bluetooth wireless
connection.
Beaming information
Your Treo 755P smartphone is equipped
with an IR (infrared) port so that you can
• If the Ringer switch is set to Sound
On
your smartphone beeps to
®
beam information to another Palm OS
notify you of the connection, and then
prompts you to accept the info. Select
a category or expansion card to
specify where you want to store the
item. If you don't select a category,
the item goes into the Unfiled
category.
device with an IR port. The IR port is
located on the side of your smartphone,
above the expansion card slot door, behind
the small dark shield.
B E A M I N G I N F O R M A T I O N
188
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
TIP For best results, the path between the
two devices must be clear of obstacles, and
both devices must be stationary. If you have
difficulty beaming, shorten the distance and
avoid bright sunlight.
DID YOU KNOW? If you beam a bookmark or
saved page from the web browser, it beams
the URL, not the contents of that page.
4
5
When the Beam Status dialog box
appears, point the IR port on your
smartphone directly at the IR port on
the receiving device.
Beaming an entry
You can beam an individual entry or item
such as a contact or a picture. You can also
beam all the entries in the selected
category, such as all the contacts in the
Business or Family category.
Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to
indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue using your
smartphone.
TIP Beam your business card in two key
presses: From the Phone application’s Main
View, press Menu, and then press the M key.
1
Select the entry or category you want to
beam. You cannot beam an item that
has a lock
next to it.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Beaming an application
Select Record, and then select one of
the following:
Not all applications can be beamed. A lock
icon
appears on the Beam screen next
Beam: Sends an individual entry.
to applications that cannot be beamed.
Beam Category: Sends all entries in
the current category.
1
2
Press Applications
Press Menu
.
.
B E A M I N G I N F O R M A T I O N
189
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
3
4
Select Beam from the App menu.
5
Select Ye s to receive the information or
No to refuse it.
Select the Beam From pick list, and
select whether the application you want
to beam is located on your Treo
TIP If you do not select a category upon
receiving a beamed item, the item is placed in
the Unfiled category.
smartphone or on an expansion card.
5
Select the application you want to
transfer.
TIP If you can’t receive beamed information,
make sure the Beam Receive option is turned
you are not running a third-party application
that disables beaming. If you still can’t receive
a beam, try a soft reset (see Resetting your
6
7
Select Beam.
When the Beam Status dialog box
appears, point the IR port on your
smartphone directly at the IR port on
the receiving device.
DID YOU KNOW? You can store a beamed
application on your smartphone, or send it to
an expansion card inserted into the expansion
card slot.
8
Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to
indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue using your
smartphone.
Receiving beamed information
1
2
Turn on your screen.
Select the beam command on the
transmitting device.
3
Point the IR port on your smartphone
directly at the IR port on the
transmitting device to open the Beam
Status dialog box.
4
When the Beam Status dialog box
appears, select a category for the entry.
B E A M I N G I N F O R M A T I O N
190
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
WINDOWS ONLY
Synchronizing
information—
advanced
1
Click HotSync manager
in the
taskbar in the lower-right corner of your
screen.
2
3
Select Custom.
Select your device name from the User
Changing which applications sync
list at the top of the screen.
By default, information from Calendar,
Contacts, Memos, Pics&Videos, and Tasks
is updated each time you synchronize your
smartphone with Palm Desktop software
(included) or Microsoft Outlook® (sold
separately). You can change which
applications synchronize. For example, if
you don’t use the Memos application and
you want to speed up synchronization, you
can turn off synchronization for Memos.
4
5
Select the application for which you
want to turn synchronization on or off,
and then click Change.
Select Synchronize the files to turn on
synchronization for an app.
Select Do nothing to turn off
synchronization for an app that currently
synchronizes (for example, to turn off
synchronization for Memos if you do not
use this app).
TIP Windows If you set up your
smartphone to sync with Outlook, you can
learn how to change which applications
synchronize, by doing the following: Click the
HotSync® manager icon in the taskbar and
select Custom. Select a conduit that syncs
with Outlook, click Change, and then click
Help.
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D
191
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
NOTE Select one of the two overwrite
options if you want the information in one
location (smartphone or computer) to
completely replace the information in the
other location for that app. For example, if
the Calendar info on your smartphone is
accurate but the info on your computer has
become corrupted, select Handheld
overwrites Desktop for the Calendar app
to have your smartphone info replace your
computer info. Note that “handheld” refers
to your smartphone and “desktop” refers
to your computer.
MAC ONLY
1
2
3
4
Double-click the Palm Desktop
in the Palm folder.
icon
From the HotSync menu, select
Conduit Settings.
From the User pop-up menu, select
your device name.
Select the application for which you
want to turn synchronization on or off,
and then click Conduit Settings.
5
Select Synchronize the files to turn on
synchronization for an app.
Select Do nothing to turn off
synchronization for an app that currently
synchronizes (for example, to turn off
synchronization for Memos if you do not
use this app).
6
(Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for
each application for which you want to
turn synchronization on or off.
7
Click OK, and then click Done.
TIP Windows To keep the current sync
setting on an ongoing basis, check the Set as
default box. If you do not check this box, the
option you select applies only the next time
you synchronize. Thereafter, info is updated
according to the default setting.
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D
192
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
NOTE Select one of the two overwrite
options if you want the information in one
location (smartphone or computer) to
completely replace the information in the
other location for that app. For example, if
the Calendar info on your smartphone is
accurate but the info on your computer has
become corrupted, select Handheld
overwrites Macintosh for the Calendar
app to have your smartphone info replace
your computer info. Note that “handheld”
refers to your smartphone.
Setting up a Bluetooth connection for
synchronization
If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth
wireless technology, you can synchronize
wirelessly over a Bluetooth connection.
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth
Select Bluetooth On.
and select
.
2
6
(Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for
each application for which you want to
turn synchronization on or off.
7
Click OK, and then close the Conduit
Settings window.
3
4
Enter a device name for your
smartphone. This is the name that
appears on the other Bluetooth device’s
screen when it connects to your
smartphone.
TIP Mac To keep the current setting on an
ongoing basis, select Make Default. If you do
not select this button, the option you select
applies only the next time you synchronize.
Thereafter, info is updated according to the
default setting.
Select the Visibility pick list and select
Visible or Temporary.
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D
193
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
8
After you finish the HotSync Setup,
select Done to return to Applications
View.
TIP After you form a partnership with a device,
you can change the Visibility setting to
Hidden. That way only devices with which
you’ve already formed a partnership can find
your smartphone. New devices cannot
request a connection.
You’re now ready to sync your smartphone
with your Bluetooth computer.
Synchronizing over a Bluetooth
connection
5
6
Select Setup Devices.
When you synchronize using your
smartphone’s Bluetooth wireless feature,
you don’t need your sync cable. This is
especially useful if you travel with a laptop
enabled with Bluetooth wireless
technology.
Select HotSync Setup.
1
Press Applications
and select
HotSync
.
7
Follow the onscreen instructions to
create a partnership between your
smartphone and your computer.
In some cases you may need to
perform setup steps on your computer
before you can complete this step.
Check your computer’s documentation
for specific setup instructions.
2
Select Local.
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D
194
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
3
4
Select the pick list below the HotSync
icon, and then select the name of the
PC you set up for Bluetooth
synchronization (see Setting up a
cable. This is especially useful if you travel
with an IR-enabled laptop.
WINDOWS ONLY
1
On your computer, click HotSync
manager in the taskbar in the
lower-right corner of your screen. Make
sure that Infrared is selected.
Select the HotSync
icon on your
smartphone.
When synchronization is complete, a
message appears at the top of your
smartphone screen. Be patient;
synchronization may take a few minutes.
Synchronizing over an infrared
connection
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Your computer must
include the following items:
2
On your smartphone, press
•
An enabled IR port and driver or have an
IR device attached to it. Check your
computer’s documentation to see if it
supports IR communication.
Applications
HotSync
and select
.
3
4
Select Local.
•
HotSync manager must be active. On a
Windows computer, you know HotSync
manager is active when its icon appears
in the lower-right corner of your screen.
Select the pick list below the HotSync
icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.
5
Position the IR port on your smartphone
within a few inches (centimeters) of the
IR port on your computer.
When you synchronize using your
smartphone’s IR port, you don’t need a
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D
195
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
6
Select the HotSync
smartphone.
icon on your
When synchronization is complete, a
message appears at the top of your
smartphone screen. Be patient;
When synchronization is complete, a
message appears at the top of your
smartphone screen. Be patient;
synchronization may take a few minutes.
Synchronizing using Wireless Sync
synchronization may take a few minutes.
In addition to allowing you to send and
receive email messages, the Wireless
Sync application works with the Calendar,
Contacts, Tasks, and Memos applications
on your smartphone to directly access
corporate groupware information on a
Microsoft Exchange or Lotus Domino
server. You can wirelessly synchronize
business email, calendar info, and contact
info on the server from your smartphone
without using a desktop computer.
MAC ONLY
1
2
3
4
5
Double-click HotSync manager
the Palm folder.
in
Click the HotSync Controls tab, and
then select Enabled.
Click the Connection Settings tab, and
then check the On box next to IR port.
Close the HotSync Software Setup
window.
On your smartphone, press
Wireless Sync interacts with your desktop
software as follows:
Applications
HotSync
and select
.
•
Microsoft Outlook® (sold separately):
Info in Calendar, Contacts, Tasks,
Memos, and the Wireless Sync
6
7
Select Local.
Select the pick list below the HotSync
icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.
application on your smartphone does
not sync directly with Outlook on your
desktop. However, if the Exchange
server synchronizes with Outlook on
your desktop, any new or updated info
you enter in these applications on your
8
9
Position the IR port on your smartphone
within a few inches (centimeters) of the
IR port on your computer.
Select the HotSync
icon on your
smartphone.
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D
196
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
smartphone also appears in Outlook
after the next server sync.
Synchronizing using Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync®
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® works
with the VersaMail® application, Calendar,
and Contacts applications on your
NOTE The Memos application is called
Notes in Outlook.
smartphone to directly access corporate
Exchange 2003 or 2007 server. If you
install the VersaMail application (available
as a free download from www.palm.com/
mypalm/755pverizon-bonus) and your
company uses Microsoft Exchange Server
2003 or 2007, you may be able to
wirelessly synchronize info in these
applications on the server from your
smartphone without using a desktop
computer.
•
Lotus Notes: Info in Calendar,
Contacts, and the Wireless Sync
application on your smartphone does
not sync directly with Notes on your
desktop. However, if the Domino server
synchronizes with Notes on your
desktop, any new or updated info you
enter in these applications on your
smartphone also appears in Notes after
the next server sync.
NOTE Depending on how your company
has set up its Lotus Notes environment,
info in the Tasks and Memos applications
on your server may synchronize directly
with Notes on your computer, or it may
sync with the server.
A Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account
interacts with your desktop software as
follows:
•
Microsoft Outlook (sold separately):
Info in Calendar, Contacts, and the
VersaMail application on your
•
Palm Desktop software: Info in
Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Memos, and
the Wireless Sync application on your
smartphone does not sync with and
does not appear in Palm Desktop
software on your desktop.
smartphone is pushed from or syncs
with the server; it does not sync directly
with Outlook on your desktop. However,
if the server pushes info to or syncs
with Outlook on your desktop, any info
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D
197
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
you enter in these applications on your
smartphone also appears in Outlook
after the next server push or sync.
Using expansion
cards
NOTE Push is a feature provided by
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync that
pushes email messages, Calendar events,
meeting invitations, and updated contact
information it receives onto your
smartphone.
The expansion card slot on your Treo
smartphone enables you to add mini-SD
cards (sold separately) to extend the
storage capacity of your smartphone. For
example, expansion cards can store the
following:
•
Palm Desktop software: Info in
Calendar, Contacts, and the VersaMail
application does not sync with and does
not appear in Palm Desktop software on
your computer.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Photos
MP3 audio files
Email attachments
Games
NOTE Info in other apps, such as Tasks
and Memos, continues to sync with and
appear in the desktop software on your
computer (Outlook or Palm Desktop
software).
eBooks
Microsoft Office files
Adobe® Acrobat® files
Applications
Databases
For complete information on using a
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account,
see the User Guide for the VersaMail
Inserting an expansion card
The expansion card slot on your
smartphone has a push-push mechanism:
push in gently to insert a card; push in
gently to remove it.
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S
198
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
1
Open the door of the expansion card
slot.
DID YOU KNOW? If the Ringer switch is set to
Sound On, you hear a confirmation tone when
you insert or remove an expansion card.
4
Close the door of the expansion card
slot.
Removing an expansion card
1
Open the door of the expansion card
slot.
2
3
Hold your smartphone with the screen
facing you, and hold the card with the
label facing you. The notch on the card
should be in the lower-left corner next to
the keyboard.
Insert the card into the expansion card
slot until you feel the card lock into
place.
2
3
Press the card into the expansion card
slot to release it from the slot.
After you feel the expansion card slot
eject the card, remove the card
from the slot.
Notch
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S
199
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
4
Close the door of the expansion card
slot.
2
3
Select the icon for the application you
want to open.
Opening applications on an expansion
card
Press Center
to open the
application.
After you insert an expansion card into the
expansion card slot, you can open any of
the applications stored on the expansion
card.
TIP Install the Palm® Files application to easily
browse and manage files on an expansion
card. Press Applications, select My Treo,
select the Bonus tab, and then select Files.
1
Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot. Applications View
automatically appears.
Accessing items stored on an expansion
card
When an expansion card contains items,
such as pictures or songs, you can access
those items directly from the card.
1
Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot. Applications View
automatically appears.
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S
200
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
2
3
Select the category pick list in the title
bar, and select All.
1
Press Applications
.
Select the icon for the application in
which you want to open the item. For
example, to view a picture, select
Pics&Videos.
Copying applications between an
expansion card and your smartphone
TIP Before you copy an application to an
expansion card, make sure that it is
compatible with Palm OS software version
5.4.5 or later. Some applications do not work
with expansion cards and do not allow you to
store files in a location that is separate from
the application.
2
3
4
Press Menu
.
Select Copy from the App menu.
Select the Copy To pick list and select
the destination: Phone or <card
name>.
5
Select the From pick list and select the
location of the application you want to
copy: Phone or <card name>.
You can copy applications from your Treo
smartphone to your expansion card and
vice versa.
6
7
Highlight the application you want to
copy.
Select Copy.
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S
201
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
Viewing expansion card information
Renaming an expansion card
If you change the contents of an expansion
card, you can rename the card to better
match its contents and to make it easy to
identify wherever you insert it.
1
Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot. Applications View
automatically appears.
2
Select the category pick list at the top
of the screen and select All.
The Card Info application displays general
information about the expansion card that
is currently in the expansion card slot. It
also enables you to rename and format a
card.
3
4
5
Select Card Info
.
Press Menu
.
Select Rename Card from the Card
menu.
6
7
Enter a new name for the card.
Press Applications
Card Info
and select
.
Select Rename.
Formatting an expansion card
TIP Before copying information to, renaming,
or formatting an expansion card, make sure
the card is not write-protected. See the
instructions that came with your card for
details.
Formatting an expansion card is similar to
formatting a disk on a computer. When
you format an expansion card, you erase all
the information stored on the card.
1
Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot. Applications View
automatically appears.
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S
202
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S
204
CHAPTER
10
Your personal settings
Customizing your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone is great way to
make it match your lifestyle and work even harder for you.
On your smartphone, you can easily customize the sounds,
fonts, screen colors, and more. Take advantage of different
levels of security. Prevent making an accidental (and expensive)
phone call by locking the keyboard. Some settings can help
extend the life of your smartphone battery. There are lots of
ways to make your smartphone work better for you.
Benefits
•
Access applications quickly
•
•
Conserve power
•
Make your screen easy to read
Enjoy your smartphone more
205
In this chapter
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
When you slide the Ringer switch back to
System sound
settings
Sound On
, it restores the previous
sound settings.
Silencing sounds
You can immediately silence all alerts,
ringtones, music that plays through the
built-in speaker, and system sounds by
sliding the Ringer switch to Sound Off
This does not mute the audio during a
phone call.
.
Sound On
Sound Off
Setting system volume levels
DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a
silent alarm that can vibrate even when the
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off. For info on
setting the vibrate option, see the section on
setting alert tones in the chapters that
describe the individual applications.
You can set the volume level for system
sounds, such as the tone that plays when
you synchronize.
TIP If the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off,
the ringer setting overrides the sound settings
and all sounds are turned off.
1
2
Slide the Ringer switch to Sound
Off . Your smartphone vibrates once
to let you know that you’ve turned
sounds off.
1
2
3
Press Applications
Sounds
and select
.
Select the Application pick list and
select System.
To hear all sounds again, slide the
Ringer switch to Sound On
.
Select the System Volume and Game
Volume pick lists and select the volume
levels.
S Y S T E M S O U N D S E T T I N G S
207
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
2
3
Press Left and Right to adjust the
brightness.
Select Done.
TIP To automatically set the backlight to the
preset low setting, press Option + Menu.
TIP You can also adjust the backlight and set
the brightness duration during a call in Power
4
Select Done.
Changing the screen font
You can change the screen font in
Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Messaging,
Tasks, and Web. The font styles may vary
between applications and some
Display and
appearance settings
applications may offer fewer choices.
Adjusting the brightness
1
Open the application in which you want
to change the font.
Depending on the lighting conditions in
which you’re using your smartphone, you
may need to adjust the brightness of the
screen and keyboard backlight.
2
3
4
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Font.
Select a font style. (In the web browser,
select the Font size pick list and select
Large or Small.)
1
Press Option
, and then press
Backlight
.
Backlight
D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E S E T T I N G S
208
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
Small
Large
Large bold
Small bold
Select OK.
5
Setting display formats
Formats Preferences enable you to select
number conventions based on geographic
regions. For example, in the United
Time: The time format. Select HH:MM
to display a 24-hour clock.
Kingdom, time often is expressed using a
24-hour clock. In the United States, time is
expressed using a 12-hour clock with an
AM or a PM suffix. Many of the built-in
applications on your Treo smartphone use
the Formats Preferences settings.
Date: The date format.
Week starts: The first day of the week
(usually Sunday or Monday).
Numbers: The format for numbers with
decimal points and commas.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Formats.
and select
4
Select Done.
.
Aligning the screen
2
3
Occasionally, your smartphone screen may
need to be readjusted. If this occurs, you
may see the wrong feature being activated
when you tap the screen. To fix the
problem, you can align the screen at any
time.
Set any of the following preferences:
Preset to: The standard number
conventions for your country. When you
select a country, the other Formats
Preferences are automatically set to
that country’s conventions. You can also
edit each option individually.
D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E S E T T I N G S
209
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Touchscreen.
and select
.
2
3
Follow the onscreen instructions and
tap the screen where indicated.
4
Select Done.
TIP You can also set the wallpaper for the
Phone application’s Main View (see
Main View) and the background for the
Calendar Agenda View (see Customizing
4
Select Done.
Changing the system color scheme
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Color Theme.
Select a color scheme from the list.
and select
Applications settings
.
2
3
You can change the Applications settings
on your smartphone so that you can easily
access the applications you use most
often. You can arrange and display your
applications by category, reassign
the buttons on your smartphone, and
A P P L I C A T I O N S S E T T I N G S
210
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
select default applications for specific
tasks.
Displaying applications by category
Do one of the following:
•
Press Applications
cycle through the categories.
repeatedly to
Arranging applications by category
You can assign an application to a category
and then display a specific category of
applications in Applications View.
•
Select the category pick list at the top
of the screen and select a category.
Select All to display all of your
applications.
1
2
3
4
Press Applications
Press Menu
.
.
Changing Applications View
Select Category on the App menu.
By default, Applications View displays each
application as an icon. As an alternative,
you can view a list of applications. The list
view is particularly useful when you have
so many applications in a category that the
applications fill up more than one screen.
Select the pick list next to each
application and select a category.
5
Select Done.
TIP To create a new category, select the
category pick list and select Edit Categories.
Select New, and then enter the category
name. Select OK to close the dialog box, and
then select OK.
1
2
3
Press Applications
Press Menu
.
.
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
DID YOU KNOW? If there is an expansion card in
the expansion card slot, the card appears in
the category pick list and is treated as a
category when you press Applications
repeatedly.
4
5
Select the View By pick list and select
List.
Select OK.
A P P L I C A T I O N S S E T T I N G S
211
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
Reassigning buttons
With Buttons Preferences you can select
which applications are associated with the
quick buttons and the Side button on your
Treo smartphone. You can assign a primary
and secondary application to each of the
three quick buttons that open an
application.
NOTE We recommend that you keep the
primary button assignments on the factory
settings until you become comfortable with
the features of your smartphone. If you do
change the primary button assignments,
remember that the instructions in this
guide and in the other help features refer to
the original button settings.
4
Select Done.
DID YOU KNOW? You can also choose an
application to open with the sync button on
the USB sync cable. To change this setting,
select HotSync on the Buttons Preferences
screen.
TIP To restore all the buttons and key
combinations to their factory settings, select
Default.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Buttons.
Select the pick list next to the button,
Option + button, or Side button that
and select
.
DID YOU KNOW? Some third-party applications
automatically take over a button when you
install the application.
2
3
Changing default applications
you want to reassign, and then select
an application.
Sometimes one application looks for
another application to handle information
(for example, a mail application might open
a browser when you select a link in an
email message). Your smartphone comes
A P P L I C A T I O N S S E T T I N G S
212
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
with a set of predefined applications to
handle email, messaging, and browser
requests from other applications. If you
have more than one application to handle
these requests on your smartphone, you
can specify which application you want to
use for each function.
Locking your
smartphone and info
Your Treo smartphone includes several
features to protect your smartphone
from inadvertent use and keep your
information private. You can lock any of the
following features on your smartphone:
Keyboard (Keyguard): You can use the
Keyguard feature to disable the keyboard
and all buttons to prevent accidental
presses in your bag or pocket.
Screen: You can disable the screen’s
touch-sensitive feature during an active call
or call alert.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Default Apps.
and select
Phone (Phone Lock): You can set your
phone to require a password to make calls.
The built-in security software lets you
make emergency calls even if your phone
is locked.
.
2
3
Select each pick list and select the
application you want to associate with
that function.
Smartphone: You can set your
smartphone to require a password for you
to see any information on your
smartphone.
4
Select Done.
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O
213
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
Entries: You can mask or hide entries
marked as private and set your smartphone
to require a password for viewing them.
TIP If you disabled Keyguard, you can turn
Keyguard on manually by pressing Option +
Power/End when the screen is on.
Locking your keyboard (Keyguard)
You can change how quickly Keyguard turns
on, or you can disable this feature
altogether. To change the Keyguard
settings, do the following:
The Keyguard feature locks the keyboard so
that you don’t accidentally press buttons or
activate items on the screen while your
smartphone is in a pocket or bag.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Keyguard.
and select
By default, Keyguard turns on whenever
the screen is off. Each time you wake up
the screen, you must turn off Keyguard to
unlock the keyboard and use your
smartphone.
.
2
3
Select the Auto-Keyguard pick list, and
then do one of the following:
• Select how quickly you want Keyguard
to turn on: When power is turned
off, 5 seconds after power off, or 30
seconds after power off.
To turn off Keyguard, do the following:
1
When the screen is off, press Power/
End to wake up the screen.
Press Center to turn off Keyguard.
2
• Select Disable to completely disable
the Keyguard feature until you turn it
on again.
4
Select Done.
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O
214
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
Locking your screen
DID YOU KNOW? When you check the boxes to
You can set your smartphone to
automatically lock the screen’s
touch-sensitive features in certain
situations.
disable the touchscreen during a call, the
touchscreen is automatically enabled again
after you end the call.
Locking your phone (Phone Lock)
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Keyguard.
and select
.
You can lock your phone to prevent
unauthorized calls and use of other
wireless features. When your phone is
locked, you must enter the correct code to
unlock it. You can still place emergency
calls when your phone is locked, however.
2
3
Check any of the following boxes:
Incoming calls received: Disables the
screen when the phone rings. You must
use the 5-way
to select the
onscreen Answer and Ignore buttons,
TIP When Phone Lock is turned on, other
people can still see the info on your
smartphone, but they cannot make calls or
use the other wireless features without your
password.
or press Send
or Power/End
to answer the call
to ignore the call.
On a call: Disables the screen after
you answer a call. You must use the
5-way
to select the onscreen
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
buttons during the call. Use this setting
to avoid accidentally pressing onscreen
buttons while you’re holding your
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Phone
Lock.
smartphone near your ear to speak.
4
Select Done.
4
(Optional) Select Advanced, enter up
to three numbers that you can dial
when your phone is locked, and then
select OK. You do not need to enter 911
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O
215
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
as one of the three numbers, because
this number is always available.
If you selected Immediately in step 5, your
phone locks right away. If you selected On
phone power off, your phone locks the next
time you press and hold Power/End
to turn off your phone.
5
Select one of the following Phone Lock
options:
On phone power off: Locks your phone
each time you turn it off. When this
setting is active, you must enter your
lock code each time you turn your phone
on again.
TIP If you want to lock your phone once in a
while, use the Immediately option to lock your
phone on demand.
Immediately: Locks your phone when
you select OK. The next time you dial a
number, you must enter your lock code
to unlock your phone. After that, you
can continue to make calls without
entering your lock code, unless you
select one of these Phone Lock options.
To disable the current Phone Lock settings:
1
2
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Phone
Lock.
3
4
Uncheck the On phone power off box.
Enter your lock code to change this
setting.
6
When prompted, enter the lock code,
and then select OK. (Unless you
changed your lock code, the lock code is
the last four digits of your phone
number.)
5
Select OK twice.
Locking your smartphone
To protect your personal information, you
can lock your smartphone. When your
smartphone is locked, you need to enter
your password to access any of your
information or use any of the features on
your smartphone, including the phone. You
7
8
If you want to change the lock code,
select Change Lock Code, enter a new
lock code, and then select OK. Repeat
this step to verify the new lock code.
Select OK.
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O
216
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
can, however, still make emergency calls
when your smartphone is locked.
5
6
When prompted, enter your password
and select OK.
Select one of the following options:
IMPORTANT If you lock your smartphone,
you must enter the exact password to
unlock it. If you forget the password, you
need to perform a hard reset to resume
using your smartphone. Performing a hard
reset deletes all the entries in your
smartphone. However, you can restore all
previously synchronized info the next time
Never: Prevents your smartphone from
locking automatically.
1
2
Press Applications
Security
and select
.
On power off: Locks your smartphone
when you turn off the screen, or when it
shuts off with the Auto-off feature.
Select the Password box.
At a preset time: Locks your
smartphone at a specific time of day.
After a preset delay: Locks your
smartphone after a period of inactivity.
7
Select OK.
3
4
Assign a password and a password hint.
Select the Auto Lock Device box.
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O
217
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
8
Do one of the following:
After you enable the mask or hide setting,
any entries marked as private are
• Select Lock & Turn Off to lock your
immediately hidden or masked. If you
define a password, you must enter it to
display private entries. If you do not define
a password, you (or anyone else) can reveal
private entries without a password.
smartphone immediately.
• Press Applications
your settings and continue using your
smartphone.
to accept
TIP After you create a password, you can lock
your system manually. Press Applications
and select Security. Select Lock & Turn Off,
and then select Off & Lock.
1
Display the entry that you want to mark
private.
2
3
4
Select Details.
Check the Private box.
Select OK.
TIP To change your password, select the
Password box, enter your current password,
and then enter the new password. To delete
your password, select the Password box and
then select Unassign.
Hiding or masking all private entries
Make sure the entries you want to mask or
hide are marked private.
Working with private entries
1
Press Applications
Security
and select
In most applications you can mark
individual entries as private. All private
entries remain visible and accessible until
you select the Security setting. You have
two Security setting options:
.
2
Select the Current Privacy pick list and
select either Hide Records or Mask
Records.
3
If prompted for your password, enter it
and then select OK.
•
Hide Records: Private entries do not
appear anywhere in the application.
•
Mask Records: Private entries are
replaced with a visual placeholder
where the entry would normally appear.
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O
218
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
Viewing all private records
Follow these steps to recover from a lost
password:
You can reveal all the entries you’ve hidden
or masked.
1
Press Applications
Security
and select
.
1
2
3
Press Applications
Security
and select
.
2
3
4
Select the Password box.
Select Lost Password.
Select Ye s .
Select the Current Privacy pick list and
select Show Records.
If prompted for your password, enter it
TIP If you want additional security for
Palm Desktop files, you may want to
purchase a third-party solution.
and then select OK.
TIP You can also access the system-wide
security settings while you’re in an
application, such as Calendar. Press Menu,
select Options, and then select Security.
Entering owner information
You can use Owner Preferences to record
information that you want to associate with
your Treo smartphone, such as your name,
company name, and home phone number.
If you lock your smartphone (see Locking
your smartphone), the Owner Preferences
information appears on the screen that
requests your password to unlock it, and
you must also enter your password to
change the Owner Preferences
Security and Palm® Desktop software
(Windows)
The Windows version of Palm® Desktop
software observes the security password
for your Treo smartphone. If you forget
your password, you cannot view your
information in Palm Desktop software. If
your smartphone is unlocked, you can
change your password on your
information.
smartphone, but all entries marked as
private are deleted. You can restore your
private entries the next time you sync.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Owner.
and select
.
2
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O
219
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
3
4
If you assigned a password with the
set the date, time, and location (time zone)
setting for your smartphone.
Security application, select Unlock,
enter your password, and then select
OK to continue.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Date & Time.
and select
.
Enter the text that you want to appear in
the Owner Preferences screen.
2
3
Select the Automatically set pick list
and select one of the following settings:
5
Select Done.
NOTE The options that appear on the
screen vary based on the setting you select
in step 3.
System settings
Setting the date and time
Nothing: No info is acquired from the
Verizon Wireless network. You must set
the date, time, and time zone yourself.
By default, your smartphone synchronizes
the date, time, and time zone with the
network when your phone is on and you
are inside a coverage area. Date & Time
Preferences also enable you to manually
Date and time: The date and time are
acquired from the Verizon Wireless
network. You must set the time zone
yourself.
S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S
220
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
Date, time, and time zone: The date,
time, and time zone are acquired from
the Verizon Wireless network. You
cannot change any of the settings.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Power.
and select
.
2
3
Set any of the following preferences:
4
If the Location pick list appears, select
it, and then select a city in your time
zone.
Brightness: Sets the intensity of the
screen and keyboard backlights. Drag
the slider or press Left and Right
to adjust the brightness level.
TIP Don’t see a city in your time zone? Select
Edit List, select Add, select a city in your
time zone, and then select OK. If necessary,
modify any of the settings in the Edit
Location dialog box, and then select OK.
5
6
If the Date and Time fields appear,
select the Date field and select the
date, and then select the Time field and
select the time.
Select Done.
Auto-off after: Determines how long
your screen stays on during a period of
inactivity. When there is no interaction
with the keyboard or screen for the
specified time period, your smartphone
turns off automatically.
TIP You can also set time zones for Calendar
Optimizing power settings
Power Preferences enable you to adjust
settings to maximize your smartphone’s
battery performance.
On a call, dim backlight after:
Determines how long the backlight
stays on at normal intensity during a
phone call. After the specified time
S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S
221
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
period, the backlight dims to conserve
power during a long phone call.
(security layer). You need a VPN client on
your smartphone if your smartphone and
your company’s server are located on
opposite sides of the firewall.
Beam Receive: Determines whether
your Treo smartphone is ready to
receive information over an infrared
Check with your company’s system
beam. If you leave this option turned off, administrator to see if a VPN is required to
you must return to this screen to turn access the corporate server. If a VPN is
on this option the next time you want to necessary, you must purchase and install a
receive a beam.
third-party VPN client on your smartphone
to use this feature.
4
Select Done.
TIP For information about third-party VPN
client software, visit www.palm.com/
TIP You can also access the brightness setting
by pressing Option + P. To temporarily dim
the screen’s brightness, press Option +
Menu.
1
2
Install your third-party VPN client. See
Installing applications for details.
Press Applications
Prefs
Select VPN.
and select
Connection settings
.
3
4
Connecting to a virtual private network
Enter the settings provided by your
corporate system administrator.
If you want to use your Treo smartphone to
access your corporate email account or
other files on your corporate server, you
may need to set up a virtual private
network (VPN) on your smartphone. A VPN
enables you to log in to your corporate
server through the company’s firewall
C O N N E C T I O N S E T T I N G S
222
CHAPTER
11
Common questions
Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you might have,
this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly
asked questions. For additional information and answers to
other common questions, visit www.palm.com/
223
In this chapter
Upgrading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
•
•
•
Set data connection features, such as
activating or ending data connections
Upgrading
Provide web clipping features, such as
PQA files
If you experience problems with your
Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone after
performing the upgrade steps in Upgrading
guide, you may have incompatible
applications or settings that were not
quarantined during the installation process.
These incompatible applications or settings
can lead to numerous issues, including
system resets and freezes. If you
experience a problem after upgrading,
follow the steps in this section to remove
the incompatible apps from your
smartphone and to transfer your other info
to your new smartphone.
Provide instant messaging features
If you want to continue using these types
of applications, please contact the
third-party developer for software updates
and info about compatibility with your Treo
755P smartphone.
WINDOWS ONLY
1
On your computer, click
Start>Programs>Palm>Safe HotSync.
2
3
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Locate the Old_Apps folder on your
computer. This folder is usually located
inside one of the following folders:
C:\Program Files\Palm\
C:\Program Files\palmOne\
C:\Program Files\Handspring\
NOTE If you have trouble installing a
third-party application, contact the
developer for assistance.
4
To help you identify the app that is
causing the problem, move one app at a
time from the Old_Apps folder to the
Backup folder, and then sync.
We recommend that you do not install
apps that do any of the following:
•
•
Modify phone functions, such as
ringtones, dialing, or caller ID
Replace organizer features, such as
Contacts or Calendar
U P G R A D I N G
225
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
If the problem recurs, delete the last
app you installed and report the
problem to its developer.
3
Confirm that your copy includes the
Backup subfolder and that all the files in
the original Backup subfolder are also in
the copy of the Backup subfolder.
5
Repeat step 4 for each of the apps in
the Old_Apps folder.
4
5
Delete all files from the original Backup
subfolder.
NOTE If you have trouble moving apps
from the Old_Apps folder to the Backup
folder, or determining which files to move,
try reinstalling the app using the original
third-party developer files.
Perform a hard reset on your Treo 755P
smartphone. See Resetting your
smartphone for instructions.
6
7
Sync your new smartphone with your
new desktop software and be sure to
select your existing device name from
the User list.
TIP Need more info on the Backup folder? See
To help you identify the app that is
causing the problem, move one
third-party app from the copy of the
Backup subfolder to the original
Backup subfolder, and then sync.
MAC ONLY
1
Locate your user folder on your
computer.
If the problem recurs, delete the last
app you installed and report the
problem to its developer.
NOTE Your user folder name is the same
as your device name and is usually found in
this location: <Mac hard drive> : Users :
<your Mac username> : Documents :
Palm : Users
8
Repeat step 7 for each of the third-party
apps in the copy of the Backup folder.
2
Select your user folder and Option-drag
it to your Mac desktop to make a copy
of that folder.
U P G R A D I N G
226
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
2
3
Restart your computer.
Desktop software
installation
Quit any active applications, including
virus scanners and Internet security
applications.
4
Make sure you’re installing the software
from the Palm Software Installation CD
that came with your new smartphone.
Other versions of the desktop software
may not work with this Treo
If you are having trouble installing the
desktop software, you may have the wrong
version of the software or some of your
computer’s resources may be unavailable.
smartphone.
TIP The Palm Software Installation CD installs
software that lets you synchronize using
Palm® Desktop software (included) or
Microsoft® Outlook® for Windows (sold
separately). If you want to synchronize using a
different personal information manager (PIM),
you must install a third-party solution. Contact
the PIM’s vendor to learn if software is
available for your smartphone.
5
Insert the Palm Software Installation CD
to restart the installation.
IMPORTANT Always use the same
language for your Treo smartphone, your
operating system, and your desktop
software. Otherwise, you may lose
information or have difficulty with
synchronization. Support is not provided for
mismatched language setups.
Follow these steps to retry the installation:
1
Make sure your computer profile
includes administrator rights to install
software. In large organizations, these
are usually granted by the system
administrator.
D E S K T O P S O F T W A R E I N S T A L L A T I O N
227
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
loading any system extras. If your
Resetting your
smartphone
smartphone loops or freezes during or after
a soft reset, a system reset may help.
Performing a system reset can release your
smartphone from an endless loop so that
you can uninstall a third-party application
that may be causing the looping.
Performing a soft reset
A soft reset is similar to restarting a
computer. If your smartphone is not
responding or you have trouble
synchronizing with your computer, a soft
reset may help. All your info is retained
when you perform a soft reset.
1
Remove the battery from your
smartphone.
2
Press and hold Up
while reinserting
the battery.
Don’t know how? See Replacing the
1
Remove the battery from your
smartphone, and then reinsert it.
3
4
5
When Date & Time Preferences
Don’t know how? See Replacing the
appears, then release Up
.
Delete the third-party application that
you suspect is causing the problem.
NOTE The reset begins when you reinsert
the battery.
Perform a soft reset. The wireless
features of your smartphone are not
available until you complete this step.
2
At the end of the soft reset, Date &
Time Preferences appears. Select
Done.
Performing a hard reset
A hard reset erases all information and
third-party software on your Treo
smartphone. Never perform a hard reset
without first trying a soft reset, a system
reset, and trying to resolve third-party
Performing a system reset
A system reset, also called a safe or warm
reset, tells your smartphone to stop what
it’s doing and start over again without
R E S E T T I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E
228
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
software issues. (See Third-party
applications for suggestions on diagnosing
third-party software issues.) After a hard
reset, you can restore previously
synchronized information the next time you
sync.
1
Remove the battery from your
smartphone, and then reinsert it.
Don’t know how? See Replacing the
2
3
When the Access Powered logo
appears, press and hold Power/End
for ten seconds, and then
IMPORTANT If you set a password on
your smartphone, performing a hard reset
reformats your smartphone. This is a more
severe form of a hard reset, which
removes all your information, and restores
your formats, preferences, and other
settings to the factory default settings.
release Power/End
.
When the Erase all data? prompt
appears, press Up
to confirm the
hard reset.
IMPORTANT If a Reformatting in
progress message appears, do not touch
your smartphone until the process is
complete. This may take up to 10 minutes.
TIP Some third-party applications do not
create a backup on your computer when you
synchronize. If you perform a hard reset, you
may lose data in these applications and you
will need to reinstall the application after the
hard reset. Please contact the application’s
developer to find out which data is backed up
during synchronization.
4
When the language selection screen
appears, select the same language you
selected for your desktop software.
IMPORTANT Always use the same
language for your Treo smartphone, your
operating system, and your desktop
software. Otherwise, you may lose
information or have difficulty with
synchronization. Support is not provided for
mismatched language setups.
R E S E T T I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E
229
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
5
6
Follow the onscreen instructions to
align the screen and set the date and
time.
(Optional) If you want to confirm that
the hard reset was successful, press
Applications
HotSync
and select
. If you see your device
name in the upper-right corner, the hard
reset was not successful.
Battery door
release
Replacing the battery
3
4
Place a finger in the notch next to the
battery, and lift up the old battery at a
45-degree angle to remove it from the
compartment.
Your Treo 755P smartphone comes with a
replaceable battery. Be sure to use a
replacement battery that is recommended
or sold by Palm and is compatible with the
Treo 755P smartphone. Failure to use the
proper battery may result in a risk of
personal injury or product damage, and it
voids your smartphone warranty.
Align the metal contacts on the new
battery with the contacts inside the
battery compartment.
1
Press Power/End
to turn off the
screen.
2
Press the battery door release, and
slide the battery door downward
to remove it from your smartphone.
R E P L A C I N G T H E B A T T E R Y
230
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
Battery
contacts
Screen
Smartphone
contacts
The screen appears blank
1
When a call lasts longer than the limit
specified in Power Preferences, the
screen dims automatically. In certain
lighting conditions, the screen may
appear blank when this occurs.
Press any key except Power/End to
restore the screen to normal brightness.
Pressing Power/End hangs up the call.
Notch
2
3
When a period of inactivity lasts longer
than the limit specified in Power
Preferences, the screen turns off. Press
5
Insert the new battery into the
compartment at a 45-degree angle,
pressing it into place. Slide the battery
door onto the back of the smartphone
until it clicks into place.
and release Power/End
to
wake up the screen.
Look closely at the screen. If you can
see a dim image, try adjusting the
6
7
Connect your smartphone to the
charger or sync cable.
Wait for your Treo smartphone to turn
on, and then enable the network time or
set the date and time when prompted.
4
5
If the screen is still blank, perform a soft
TIP Be sure to dispose of your old battery
properly. In some areas, disposal in household
or business trash is prohibited.
If the problem persists, connect your
smartphone to the charger (see
Charging the battery) and perform a soft
reset again.
S C R E E N
231
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
6
If that doesn’t work, perform a hard
There’s a blinking bell in the upper-left
corner
The blinking bell in the upper-left corner of
the screen is the Alert screen symbol. It
appears when you have alarms or
TIP To find carrying cases that protect the
screen and other useful accessories, visit
messages that you haven’t acknowledged.
1
Press and hold Center
blinking bell with your stylus.
or tap the
The screen doesn’t respond accurately to
taps or it activates wrong features
2
When the list of pending alerts appears,
do any of the following:
1
2
3
Press Applications
and use the
5-way
to select Prefs .
• Select the alert text to view the item
and keep it in the list.
Use the 5-way
Touchscreen.
to select
• Check the box next to an alert to clear
it from the list, and then select Done.
Follow the onscreen instructions to
align the screen.
4
5
Select Done.
If the problem persists, check for dirt
between the screen and the edge of the
smartphone.
Synchronization
Synchronization backs up the information
from your smartphone onto your computer
and vice versa. If you ever need to perform
a hard reset or otherwise need to erase all
your information on your smartphone, you
can synchronize your smartphone with
your computer to restore the info. Similarly,
if your computer crashes and your
6
If you’re using a screen protector, make
sure that it is properly installed.
Palm Desktop info is damaged, you can
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
232
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
recover your info by synchronizing with
device name is two words, your user folder
your smartphone. To make sure you always name consists of the first six characters of
have an up-to-date backup of your info,
synchronize frequently.
the second word of your device name
followed by the first letter of the first word.
For example, if your device name is John
Smith, your user folder is named SmithJ.
Your user folder is usually located inside
one of the following folders:
C:\Program Files\Palm\
C:\Program Files\palmOne\
C:\Program Files\Handspring\
This section describes synchronization
between your Treo smartphone and a
desktop computer running Palm Desktop
software. You can also synchronize the
information on your smartphone using
Wireless Sync or other third-party
applications. See the separate
documentation for Wireless Sync or other
third-party applications for information on
features and configuration.
MAC ONLY Your user folder name is the
same as your device name and is usually
found in this location: Mac hard drive :
Users : Your Mac username : Documents
: Palm : Users.
Before you attempt to synchronize, make
sure you’ve installed the desktop
synchronization software from the Palm
Software Installation CD.
What is the backup folder?
The Backup folder is located inside your
During synchronization, HotSync® manager
puts a copy of most of your info and
TIP Every device needs a unique name. Never
synchronize more than one device to the
same device name on your computer.
applications in the Backup folder. (Some
third-party apps do not put a copy in the
Backup folder.) The next time you sync,
HotSync manager compares the contents
of the Backup folder to the contents of your
I can’t find my user folder
WINDOWS ONLY If your device name is
one word, your user folder name is the first
six characters of your device name. If your
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
233
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
smartphone, and then restores any missing
info or applications.
manager icon, click Start, select
Programs, select Palm, and then select
HotSync Manager.
If an app that you deleted reappears on
your smartphone, try deleting the app from
your Backup folder.
HotSync
manager icon
Palm® Desktop software does not respond
to a sync attempt
1
Make sure that the USB sync cable is
securely connected to the USB port on
your computer and on the bottom of
your smartphone (see Synchronizing
Mac: Find the Palm folder on your Mac
hard drive. Double-click HotSync
manager
in the Palm folder. In the
Connection Settings panel, set the
Local Setup port to Palm USB.
TIP If you’re having trouble trying to sync
using an IR or Bluetooth® connection, try
using the USB sync cable instead. If this
solves the problem, then check your IR or
Bluetooth settings (see Synchronizing
3
Synchronize. If the synchronization is
successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
4
5
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a
Synchronize. If the synchronization is
successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
2
Make sure that HotSync manager is
running:
Windows: Right-click HotSync
6
If problems persist and you’re
synchronizing through a USB hub, try
connecting the sync cable to a different
manager
in the taskbar in the
lower-right corner of your computer
screen, and make sure that Local USB
is checked. If you don’t see the HotSync
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
234
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
USB port or directly to your computer’s
built-in USB port.
Synchronization starts but stops without
finishing
7
8
Reboot your computer.
TIP The HotSync Log can give you information
about your most recent synchronization.
Synchronize. If the synchronization is
successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
Windows: Right-click the HotSync manager
icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of
your computer screen, and then select View
Log.
9
Do one of the following:
Windows: Uninstall Palm software.
Click Start, select Settings, select
Control Panel, select Add or Remove
Programs, select Palm Desktop
software, and then click Change/
Remove.
Mac: Open Palm Desktop software. From the
HotSync menu, select View Log.
®
If you upgraded from a previous Palm OS
device or received a system error, such as
Sys0505, there may be conflicts with
software on your smartphone.
Mac: Contact Technical Support if the
problem persists after completing step
7. Mac computers do not provide an
option for uninstalling Palm Desktop
software.
1
Locate your Backup subfolder and
rename the folder (for example,
BackupOld). Note that “Palm” in the
following locations might be
“Handspring” or “palmOne,” based on
the device you’re upgrading from:
10 Reboot your computer.
11 Reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Palm Software Installation CD that
came with your smartphone.
Windows:
C:\Program Files\Palm\device name
Mac:
Mac HD/Users/user name/Documents/
Palm/Users/device name
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
235
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
2
3
Synchronize.
Palm Desktop software, and then click
Change/Remove.
If the problem is resolved, begin
reinstalling your third-party applications
one at a time by double-clicking a single
file in the original Backup subfolder that
you renamed, and sync after each
application you install. If the problem
recurs, delete the last application you
installed and report the problem to its
developer.
6
7
Reboot your computer.
Reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Palm Software Installation CD that
came with your smartphone.
Synchronization finishes but info doesn’t
appear where it should
1
Make sure you’re synchronizing with
the intended desktop personal
information manager (PIM). The Palm
Software Installation CD enables you to
choose whether you want to
synchronize with Palm Desktop
software (included) or Microsoft
Outlook for Windows (sold separately).
Reinsert the installation CD and select
Change your synchronization
method if necessary. If you use a
different PIM, you need to install
third-party software to synchronize. For
more info, consult the company that
makes the PIM.
4
Do one of the following:
Windows: If the Windows New
Hardware Wizard appears, the
synchronization process may be timing
out before the wizard completes its job.
Follow all instructions in the New
Hardware Wizard, and then sync again.
Mac: Contact Technical Support if the
problem persists after completing step
3. Mac computers do not provide an
option for uninstalling Palm Desktop
software.
5
(Windows only) Uninstall Palm Desktop
software. Click Start, select Settings,
select Control Panel, select Add or
Remove Programs, select
2
If multiple Palm OS devices are
synchronizing with your computer,
make sure you are synchronizing with
the correct device name. If info is not
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
236
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
appearing in Palm Desktop software,
make sure the correct device name is
selected in the User list on the toolbar
of Palm Desktop software.
Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to
be available offline.
TIP Outlook subfolders and public folders are
not accessible with the included software.
You may wish to use a third-party solution
instead.
3
4
Open HotSync manager on your
computer, and make sure the necessary
conduits are set to Synchronize the
files.
TIP (Outlook only) If you want to sync your
info with a global Exchange Address Book,
you must copy the addresses to your local
Contacts list in Outlook (right-click the
addresses and select Add to Personal
Address Book).
Do one of the following:
Windows: Uninstall Palm Desktop
software. Click Start, select Settings,
select Control Panel, select Add or
Remove Programs, select
Palm Desktop software, and then click
Change/Remove.
TIP For more info on Outlook conduits,
right-click the HotSync manager icon in the
taskbar, select Custom, select an app with
Outlook in its name, and then select Help.
Mac: Contact Technical Support if the
problem persists after completing step
3. Mac computers do not provide an
option for uninstalling Palm Desktop
software.
I have duplicate entries in Microsoft
Outlook after I sync
1
Open Microsoft Outlook (sold
separately) and delete the duplicate
entries.
5
6
Reboot your computer.
2
On your computer, go to the Outlook
application with duplicate entries and
manually enter any info you added to
your smartphone since the last time
you synchronized.
Reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Palm Software Installation CD that
came with your smartphone.
7
(Outlook only) If you’re trying to
synchronize offline, set your Outlook
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
237
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
3
4
Right-click HotSync manager
taskbar, and select Custom.
in the If you’re using Microsoft Outlook (sold
separately):
Select the application that has duplicate
entries and also has Outlook in its
name, such as Outlook contacts.
1
Make sure that you installed the
Microsoft Outlook conduit that came
with your Treo 755P smartphone. If
you’re not sure whether this software is
installed, reinstall Palm Desktop
software from the Palm Software
Installation CD that came with your
smartphone.
5
6
Click Change.
Select Desktop overwrites handheld,
and then click OK.
7
If more than one Outlook application
has duplicate entries, then repeat steps
4 through 6 for each application with
duplicates.
2
3
Open Microsoft Outlook and correct the
wrong entries.
On your computer, manually enter any
Calendar info you added to your
smartphone since the last time
you synchronized.
8
9
Click Done.
Synchronize your smartphone and your
computer.
4
5
Click HotSync manager
taskbar and select Custom.
in the
My appointments show up in the wrong
time slot after I sync
Select an application that has both
Calendar and Outlook in its name.
If you create an appointment in the wrong
time zone (i.e., your desktop was set to the
wrong time zone), it shows up in the wrong
time zone on your smartphone. To be safe,
enable local network time and avoid
assigning time zones to your
6
7
Click Change.
Select Desktop overwrites handheld,
and then click OK.
8
Synchronize your smartphone and your
computer.
appointments.
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
238
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
9
Repeat steps 4 through 6 to open the
Calendar Change HotSync Action
dialog box.
7
Click HotSync manager
taskbar and select Custom.
in the
8
9
Select Calendar.
10 Select Synchronize the files, and then
Click Change.
click OK.
10 Select Desktop overwrites handheld,
You should now be able to assign time
zones to your events without encountering
this problem.
and then click OK.
11 Synchronize your smartphone and your
computer.
If you’re using Palm Desktop software:
12 Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the
Calendar Change HotSync Action
dialog box.
1
On your smartphone, press
Calendar
.
13 Select Synchronize the files, and then
2
3
Press Menu
.
click OK.
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
You should now be able to assign time
zones to your events without encountering
this problem.
4
5
6
Uncheck the New events use time
zones box (if it’s checked).
IMPORTANT To avoid this problem in the
future, do not assign time zones to your
events. Palm Desktop software does not
support time zones.
On your computer, open Palm Desktop
software and correct the wrong entries.
On your computer, manually enter any
Calendar info you added to your
smartphone since the last time
you synchronized.
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
239
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
My smartphone won’t connect to the
mobile network
Phone
1
Try the suggestions about signal
strength described in Signal strength is
weak.
Signal strength is weak
Become familiar with low coverage areas
where you live, commute, work, and play.
Then you will know when to expect signal
strength issues. You can check signal
strength by looking at the signal-strength
icon in the title bar of the Phone
2
3
Turn off your phone and turn it on again
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a
application’s Main View. The stronger the
signal, the more bars that appear. If you are
outside a coverage area, no bars appear.
The other person hears an echo
•
•
•
Try decreasing the volume on your Treo
smartphone to avoid coupling or
feedback on the other person’s end.
This applies to both the speakerphone
and the earpiece.
1
2
3
4
5
If you’re standing, move about ten feet
(about 3 meters) in any direction.
If you’re in a building, move near a
window. Open any metal blinds.
Position the earpiece closer to your ear
to prevent sound leaking back to the
microphone. Keep your hand away from
the microphone hole, which is on the
bottom right side of the smartphone.
If you’re in a building, move outdoors or
to a more open area.
If you’re outdoors, move away from
large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.
If you’re using the speakerphone
If you’re in a vehicle, move your Treo
smartphone so that it’s level with a
window of your vehicle.
feature with your smartphone lying on a
flat surface, try turning the smartphone
face down (screen facing the surface).
P H O N E
240
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
I hear my own voice echo
If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free
device, try the following:
Ask the person on the other end of the call
to turn down the volume on his or her
phone or to hold the phone closer to his or
her ear.
•
Move your smartphone closer to the
hands-free device. Audio quality
degrades as the distance between your
smartphone and hands-free device
increases. The effective range for a
device varies between manufacturers.
My voice is too quiet on the other end
•
Be sure to place the bottom of the Treo
smartphone, or the hands-free
•
Confirm that no obstructions, including
your body, are between the smartphone
and your hands-free device.
microphone, close to your mouth.
•
Check the signal-strength
icon in
the title bar of the Phone application’s
Main View. If the signal is weak (few
bars are displayed), try the suggestions
about signal strength described in
TIP For best performance, keep your
Bluetooth headset and phone on the same
side of your body.
My smartphone hangs up when I hold it
to my ear
I hear static or interference
Check the signal-strength
title bar of the Phone application’s Main
View. If the signal is weak (few bars are
icon in the
You may be accidentally pressing the
onscreen Hang Up All button with your
cheek. Try holding the smartphone so that
displayed), try the suggestions about signal your face doesn’t press against the screen.
strength described in Signal strength is
weak.
If this is not convenient, you may want to
disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature
during active calls (see Locking your
screen).
P H O N E
241
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
My phone seems to turn off by itself
prevent your smartphone from making calls,
as well as other useful accessories, visit
www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon.
If a system error and reset occur, the Treo
smartphone automatically turns the phone
on if it was on before the reset. However, if
the smartphone can’t determine if your
phone was on before the reset, the phone
your phone on and off). If the problem
persists and you’re using third-party
for additional suggestions.
The voicemail icon stays on the screen
after I listen to my messages
If the voicemail icon stays in the title bar
after you listen to your messages, you can
manually clear the voicemail icon.
1
2
3
In the Phone application, press
Menu
My smartphone makes or answers calls
when it’s in a bag or pocket
.
Select Options and then select Phone
Preferences.
Items in your bag or pocket may be
pressing the onscreen Answer button or
otherwise activating screen items. If this
happens, be sure to press Power/End
to turn off the screen before placing
your smartphone in a bag or pocket. You
may also want to disable the screen’s
touch-sensitive feature during incoming
Select Clear Voicemail Icon.
P H O N E
242
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
•
•
Your hands-free device is charged and
turned on.
Hands-free devices
Your Treo smartphone is within range of
the hands-free device.
TIP Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet (10
meters) in optimum environmental
conditions. Performance and range may be
affected by physical obstacles, radio
interference from nearby electronic
equipment, and other factors.
If the problem persists, turn the Bluetooth
setting Off and then turn it On again. If it
still persists, create a new partnership with
the hands-free device (see Connecting to a
I can’t make or receive calls using a
Bluetooth® hands-free device
I hear static or interference when using
my Bluetooth hands-free device
Confirm all the following:
•
Try moving your Treo smartphone closer
to the hands-free device. Audio quality
degrades as the distance between your
smartphone and hands-free device
increases. The effective range for a
device varies between manufacturers.
•
The Bluetooth device is compatible with
your smartphone. Go to
www.palm.com/
treo755pverizon-support for a list of
compatible devices.
•
•
Confirm that no obstructions, including
your body, are between the smartphone
and your hands-free device.
•
•
Press Applications
and select
Bluetooth
. Make sure the
Bluetooth setting is On.
If the problem persists, turn the
Bluetooth setting Off and then turn it
back On again. If it still persists, create a
new partnership with the hands-free
You have already formed a partnership
between your smartphone and your
hands-free device, and that the
hands-free device appears in the
Trusted Devices list (see Connecting to
H A N D S - F R E E D E V I C E S
243
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
Messaging
TIP For best performance, keep your
Bluetooth headset and phone on the same
side of your body.
I can’t tell if data services are available
When your phone is on, icons appear in the
title bar in the Phone application’s Main
View to indicate whether data services are
available and whether a data connection is
description of the icons that indicate that
data services are available.
Some features of my Bluetooth
hands-free device don’t work with my
smartphone
•
Check the Palm compatibility list at
www.palm.com/
treo755pverizon-support to ensure that
your device is compatible.
•
Check the documentation that came
with your device or the manufacturer’s
website for information specific to
your device.
TIP If your phone is on and you do not see any
of the data icons, then data services are not
available in your current location.
I can’t send or receive text messages
•
Make sure your phone is turned on (see
Email
•
Contact Verizon Wireless to verify that
your plan includes text messaging
services, that these services have been
correctly activated, and that they are
available at your location. Verizon
Wireless should be able to tell you if
messaging services have been
•
For troubleshooting info on Wireless
Sync, go to:
•
For troubleshooting info on the
VersaMail® application, see the User
Guide for the VersaMail Application at
www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon.
experiencing transmission delays.
Delays can also occur between the time
E M A I L
244
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
that a message is sent and the time it is
received.
the title bar of Main View of the Phone
application. If you do not see either of
these icons, data services are not
available in your current location and you
cannot exchange MMS messages.
•
•
Verify with the recipient that the
receiving device can handle text
messages.
•
•
Verify with the recipient that the
receiving device can handle multimedia
messages.
If a text message arrives but does not
display an alert, perform a soft reset
If a message arrives but does not
display an alert, perform a soft reset
I can’t send or receive multimedia (MMS)
messages
•
Make sure your phone is turned on (see
Web
•
Contact Verizon Wireless to verify that
your plan includes MMS multimedia
messaging services, that these services
have been correctly activated, and that
they are available at your location.
Verizon Wireless should be able to tell
you if messaging services have been
experiencing transmission delays.
Delays can also occur between the time
that a message is sent and the time it is
received.
I can’t tell if data services are available
When your phone is on, icons appear in the
title bar in the Phone application’s Main
View to indicate whether data services are
available and whether a data connection is
description of the icons that indicate that
data services are available.
•
Make sure that either the
TIP If your phone is on and you do not see any
of the data icons, then data services are not
available in your current location.
NationalAccess
or
BroadbandAccess
icon appears in
WE B
245
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
My smartphone won’t connect to the
Internet
6
7
Select Connect.
If the connection is successful, go the
web browser. If you still can’t make a
connection, perform a soft reset (see
Your Treo 755P smartphone supports the
NationalAccess and BroadbandAccess
wireless data networks. To connect to the
Internet, you must subscribe to and
activate data services with Verizon
Wireless, and you must be in a location
with data coverage.
8
9
If your phone did not turn on
automatically, press and hold Power/
End
to turn on your phone, and
try connecting to the Internet.
1
Press and hold Power/End
to
Contact Verizon Wireless to verify the
following:
turn off your phone. Then press
and hold the same button to turn it back
on again.
• Your subscription plan includes
high-speed data services
2
Press Phone
the NationalAccess
BroadbandAccess
bar of the Phone application’s Main
View.
and look for either
• Data services have been activated on
your account
or
icon in the title
• Data coverage is available in your
location
• There are no data service outages in
your location
3
If you see one of these icons, you are in
a data coverage area. Try connecting to
the Internet again. If you do not see
either of these icons, press
Applications
and continue with the following steps.
I can’t access a web page
First, make sure you have Internet access:
Open the web browser and try to view
another web page you’ve loaded before. To
ensure you’re viewing the page directly
, select Prefs
,
4
5
Select Network.
Select the Services pick list and select
BroadbandAccess.
from the Internet, press Menu
, select
Go, and then select Refresh.
W E B
246
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
If you can view the other web page after
a high-speed data service, it seems slow if
you refresh it, but you still can’t access the you are used to BroadbandAccess speed.
page you were originally trying to view, the
1
Press Phone
the NationalAccess
BroadbandAccess
bar of the Phone application’s Main
View.
and look for either
page may contain elements that are not
supported by the web browser. These
include Flash, Shockwave, VBScript,
WMLScript, and other plug-ins.
or
icon in the title
Some websites use a redirector to their
true home page. If the web browser on
your smartphone can’t follow the
redirector, try using a desktop browser to
see the landing page of the redirector, and
then enter that address in the web browser
on your smartphone.
2
If you see the BroadbandAccess
icon, then there may be a problem with
the web site you are trying to access.
Try opening a different web page to see
if the problem persists.
3
4
If you see the NationalAccess
icon,
then you may be experiencing the
difference in performance between the
two types of data networks.
TIP Your Treo smartphone can open your email
application when you select an email address
on a web page. If nothing happens when you
select the link, make sure your email
application is already set up.
To be sure there is not a problem with
your connection to the Verizon Wireless
network, press and hold Power/End
to turn off your phone. Then
press and hold the same button to turn
it back on again.
It takes a long time for a web page to load
If it is taking longer than usual to load web
pages, you may have traveled from a
BroadbandAccess service area to a
5
Try opening the web page again to see
if it loads faster.
NationalAccess service area. Although
NationalAccess data service is considered
WE B
247
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
An image or map is too small on
my screen
Camera
The web browser has two modes:
Optimized and Wide Page. Optimized
Mode resizes all images and page
elements to fit in a single column on the
smartphone screen. Switch to Wide Page
Mode to see the full-size image (see
TIP If your smartphone does not have a built-in
camera, the information in this section about
taking pictures does not apply to you.
Here are some tips for taking good pictures
with the built-in camera:
You may also be able to save the image on
your smartphone or an expansion card and
then view the image later on your
computer.
•
Clean the camera’s lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth.
•
Take pictures in bright lighting
conditions. Low-light images may be
grainy, due to the sensitivity of the
camera.
A secure site refuses to permit a
transaction
Some websites don’t support certain
browsers for transactions. Please contact
the site’s webmaster to make sure the site
allows transactions using your
•
Hold the smartphone as still as
possible. Try supporting your
picture-taking arm against your body or
a stationary object (such as a wall).
smartphone’s Blazer® web browser.
•
•
Keep the subject of the picture still.
Exposure time is longer with lower light
levels, so you may see a blur.
For best results, verify that you have the
brightest light source coming from
behind you, lighting the subject’s face.
C A M E R A
248
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
Avoid taking indoor pictures with the
subject in front of a window or light.
fill up. Here are some common ways to
clear space:
•
Make sure the subject is at least 18
inches (45.72 centimeters) away from
the camera to ensure good focus.
•
Email: Messages that have large
attachments can quickly consume
memory on your smartphone. Delete
messages with large attachments. If
you have hundreds of messages with or
without attachments, you may want to
delete older messages to make room
(see the User Guide for the VersaMail
755pverizon. or the Wireless Sync
documentation at http://
When you synchronize your smartphone
with your computer, your camera images
are stored on your hard drive (see Viewing
Making room on your
Treo™ smartphone
•
Pics&Videos: Large images take up a
lot of memory. Move images to an
expansion card or synchronize them to
your computer, and then delete the
images from your smartphone (see
video).
Keep in mind that your smartphone
includes an expansion card slot, and that
you can store applications and information
on expansion cards (sold separately).
However, you still need free memory on
the smartphone itself to run applications
from an expansion card. For more info on
using expansion cards, see Using
•
Music: Music files often consume
excessive memory. Move music files to
an expansion card, or delete large files
If you store a large number of records or
install many third-party applications, the
internal memory on your smartphone may
M A K I N G R O O M O N Y O U R T R E O ™ S M A R T P H O N E
249
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
•
•
Messaging: Multimedia content can
also consume excessive memory. Move keyboard and 5-way navigator in these
multimedia content to an expansion
card, or delete large files from your
strange behavior or errors when using the
applications. Third-party applications that
modify wireless features may require extra
troubleshooting.
Internet: If you set a large web browser
cache, you may want to use the web
browser’s advanced Memory
Management settings to clear all recent
pages (see Customizing your web
If you recently installed an application and
your device seems to be stuck, try the
following:
1
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a
2
If the problem persists, perform a
reset).
•
Third-party applications: You can delete
infrequently used applications (see
Removing applications) or move them
to an expansion card (see Copying
3
Delete the most recently installed
application from your smartphone (see
4
5
If the problem persists, perform another
system reset.
Third-party
applications
If possible, synchronize your
smartphone with your computer to back
up your most recent info.
6
If you’re unable to perform the
Some third-party applications can cause
conflicts on your smartphone. For example,
third-party applications that were not
written with the Treo smartphone keyboard
and 5-way navigator in mind may cause
preceding steps or the problem
persists, locate your Backup subfolder
on your computer and rename the
folder (for example, BackupOld). Note
that “Palm” in the following locations
T H I R D - P A R T Y A P P L I C A T I O N S
250
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
might be “Handspring” or “palmOne,”
based on the device you’re upgrading
from:
Error messages
Your Treo smartphone is designed to
minimize interruptions when a system
error occurs. If your smartphone
encounters a system error, it automatically
resets itself and resumes functioning as
normal. If possible, it even turns the phone
back on if it was on before the error
occurred.
Windows:
C:\Program Files\Palm\device name
Mac:
Mac HD/Users/user name/Documents/
Palm/Users/device name
7
8
9
Perform a hard reset (see Performing a
Sync to restore your Calendar, Contacts,
Tasks, Memos, and Pics&Videos info.
Sometimes you might want to know more
about an error. Your Treo smartphone uses
a special interface to show error messages
in greater detail.
If the problem is resolved, begin
reinstalling your third-party applications
one at a time by double-clicking a single
file in the original Backup subfolder that
you renamed, and sync after each
application you install.
1
2
Press Phone
.
Enter # #377, and then press Send
*
.
3
Review the screen with details about
the conditions that led up to the most
recent automatic reset.
10 If the problem recurs, delete the last
application you installed and report the
problem to its developer.
4
Select OK.
Getting more help
NOTE Third-party developers create their
own error messages. If you do not
understand an error message, please
contact the developer of the application for
help.
Contact the author or vendor of the
third-party software if you require further
assistance.
E R R O R M E S S A G E S
251
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
E R R O R M E S S A G E S
252
Beam
Terms
The process of sending or receiving an
entry or application using the infrared port
on your Treo smartphone.
1xRTT (single carrier [1x] radio
transmission technology)
®
Bluetooth wireless technology
A wireless technology that provides fast
data transfer and Internet access with
average speeds of 60 to 80Kbps and bursts
of up to 144Kbps. Also called
NationalAccess for Verizon Wireless
customers.
Technology that enables devices such as
smartphones, mobile phones, and
computers to connect wirelessly to each
other so that they can exchange
information over short distances.
BroadbandAccess
Alt (alternative)
The name Verizon Wireless has given to a
wireless broadband technology that is
designed for very high speed data transfer
with average download speeds of 400 to
700Kbps. It is capable of reaching
download speeds of up to 1.8Mbps and
upload speeds of up to 156Kbps. Also
called EVDO.
A keyboard key. Enter a letter on the
keyboard, and then press Alt
to access
variations such as international characters
and symbols.
Applications
The screen on your Palm® Treo™ 755P
smartphone from which you can open all
applications.
BroadBandAccess Connect
Auto-off interval
The name Verizon Wireless has given to a
wireless technology that enables you to
convert your smartphone into a wireless
modem so that you can access the Internet
from your computer. Also called dial-up
networking.
The time of inactivity that passes before
the screen on your smartphone turns off.
The wireless features on your smartphone
are unaffected by this setting.
T E RMS
253
Device name
called BroadbandAccess for Verizon
Wireless customers.
The name associated with your Treo
smartphone that distinguishes it from
other Palm OS® devices. When you first
synchronize your smartphone, you are
asked to give it a device name. This name
appears in the User list in Palm Desktop
software.
Favorite
A button that provides quick access to a
phone number (speed dial) or commonly
used application (such as Contacts, Web,
or Messaging). You can define up to 70
favorite buttons in the Phone application.
Dial-up networking (DUN)
HotSync® technology
The wireless technology that enables you
to convert your smartphone into a wireless
modem so that you can access the Internet
from your computer using the Verizon
Wireless BroadbandAccess Connect
service.
The technology that synchronizes your
smartphone and your computer with the
simple press of a button.
HotSync® manager
The computer application that manages the
synchronization of your Treo smartphone
with your computer.
Dialog box
A set of options and command buttons that
is enclosed by a border and that enables
you to carry out a specific task.
Infrared (IR)
A way of transmitting information using
light waves. The IR port on your
smartphone enables you to transfer
information to other IR devices within a
short radius.
EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized)
A wireless broadband technology that is
designed for very high speed data transfer
with average download speeds of 400 to
700Kbps. It is capable of reaching
Lithium ion (Li-ion)
download speeds of up to 1.8Mbps and
upload speeds of up to 156Kbps. Also
The rechargeable battery technology used
in Treo smartphones.
T E R M S
254
MMS (Multimedia Messaging System)
applications that can be added to your Treo
755P smartphone.
An enhanced form of messaging that
enables you to send pictures, videos,
animations, sounds, and ringtones almost
instantly.
Palm® Quick Install
The component on your Windows
computer that enables you to install Palm
OS applications and other information on
your Treo smartphone.
NationalAccess
The name Verizon Wireless has given to a
wireless technology that provides fast data
transfer and Internet access with average
speeds of 60 to 80Kbps and bursts of up to
144Kbps. Also called 1xRTT.
Partnership
Two Bluetooth devices—for example, your
smartphone and a hands-free device—that
can connect because each device finds the
same passkey on the other device. Once
you form a partnership with a device, you
don’t need to enter a passkey to connect
with that device. Partnership is also known
as paired relationship, pairing, Trusted
Device, and Trusted Pair on some devices.
Option key
The keyboard button that enables you to
access the alternative feature that appears
above the letter on each key.
Palm® Desktop software
A PIM application for computers that helps
you manage your personal information and
keep your personal information
Phone
The application on your Treo smartphone
that enables you to make and receive
phone calls.
synchronized with your Treo smartphone.
Palm OS® software
PIM (personal information manager)
The operating system of your Treo 755P
smartphone. Palm OS software is known
for its simplicity of use and for the large
number of compatible third-party
A genre of software that includes
applications such as Palm Desktop
software, Microsoft® Outlook®, Lotus
Notes, ACT!, and the Palm OS organizer
T E RMS
255
applications on your smartphone. PIMs
phones. These messages can usually
generally store contacts, schedules, tasks, include up to 160 characters; messages
and memos.
with more than 160 characters are
automatically split into several messages.
Treo smartphones can send and receive
SMS messages while you are on a voice
call.
Pix Place
The companion website for Verizon
Wireless picture and video messaging
services.
Streaming
Slide
Technology that enables you to access
media content—for example, watch video
or listen to an audio program—directly
from the Internet on your smartphone
without needing to download a file to save
on your smartphone.
A collection of text, pictures, videos, and
sounds that are grouped together within a
multimedia message. During playback, all
the items within a particular slide appear
on the same screen. If a multimedia
message contains multiple slides, each
slide can be viewed separately during
playback.
User folder
The folder on your computer that contains
the information you enter in Palm Desktop
software and the information you enter on
your smartphone and synchronize with
Palm Desktop software.
SMS (Short Messaging Service)
The service that exchanges short text
messages almost instantly. Text messages
are typically exchanged between mobile
T E R M S
256
•
An accessory that contains NO metal (snaps, clips, etc.) and
provides AT LEAST 1.5 cm of separation between the users body
and the unit.
Important safety and
legal information
Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct contact
with the body (i.e., on the lap or in a breast pocket). Such use will
likely exceed FCC RF safety exposure limits See www.fcc.gov/oet/
rfsafety/ for more information on RF exposure safety.
FCC Notice
The highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Palm® Treo™ 755P
smartphone, by Palm are:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
Maximum SAR
Values
BroadbandAccess
Cellular
BroadbandAccess
PCS
Held to Ear
1.07 (W/1Kg)
0.89 (W/1Kg)
1.46 (W/1Kg)
0.33 (W/1Kg)
Body - Worn
FCC Radiofrequency Emission
This smartphone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission
Guidelines and is certified with the FCC as:
FCC ID number: O8F-895.
More information on the smartphone's SAR can be found from the
following FCC Website:
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility Your Treo smartphone is compliant
with the FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) requirements. For
additional HAC information, including the HAC rating of this product,
Antenna Care/Unauthorized Modifications
Use only the supplied integral antenna. Unauthorized antenna
modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may violate
FCC regulations. Any changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Palm® Device
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices
if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such
an occurrence.
FCC RF Safety Statement
Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused
by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. To
most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than
annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing
In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, users
MUST use one of the following types of bodyworn accessories.
•
A Palm™ brand body-worn accessory that has been tested for
SAR compliance and is intended for use with this product.
I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D L E G A L I N F O R M A T I O N
257
your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock—
the discharge event—when you touch a metal doorknob. This little
shock discharges the built-up static electricity.
•
The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect
electronic devices.
While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge
static electricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD
events, you may want to take extra precautions to protect your
electronic equipment against ESD.
ESD-susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can harm
circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take measures to
®
help protect your electronic devices, including your Palm device,
from ESD harm. While Palm has built protections against ESD into its
products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless neutralized, could
build up to levels that could harm your equipment. Any electronic
device that contains an external entry point for plugging in anything
from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD.
Devices that you carry with you, such as your smartphone, build up
ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built
up on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when
the device is connected to another device such as a docking station, a
discharge event can occur.
Battery safety information
•
Do not disassemble or open, crush, bend or deform, puncture or
shred.
•
Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects
into the battery, immerse or expose to water or other liquids,
expose to fire, explosion or other hazard.
•
•
Only use the battery for the system for which it is specified.
Only use the battery with a charging system that has been
qualified with the system per this standard. Use of an unqualified
battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage,
or other hazard.
Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built-up static
electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before touching
an electronic device or connecting one device to another. The
recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution before
connecting your device to your computer, placing the device in a
cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do this in many
ways, including the following:
•
•
Do not short circuit a battery or allow metallic conductive objects
to contact battery terminals.
Replace the battery only with another battery that has been
qualified with the system per this standard, IEEE-Std-1725-200x.
Use of an unqualified battery may present a risk of fire, explosion,
leakage or other hazard.
•
Ground yourself when you’re holding your mobile device by
simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground.
For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged
into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case
should discharge the ESD on your body.
•
Promptly dispose of used batteries in accordance with local
regulations.
•
•
Increase the relative humidity of your environment.
•
•
Battery usage by children should be supervised.
Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.
Avoid dropping the phone or battery. If the phone or battery is
dropped, especially on a hard surface, and the user suspects
damage, take it to a service center for inspection.
Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can
contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment
include the following:
•
Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion or other
hazard.
•
•
Low relative humidity.
Material type. (The type of material gathering the charge. For
example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural
fibers like cotton.)
I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D L E G A L I N F O R M A T I O N
258
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound
normal.
Waste disposal
This symbol indicates that Palm products should be
recycled and not be disposed of in unsorted
Municipal waste. Palm products should be sent to a
facility that properly recycles electrical and electronic
equipment. For information on environmental
programs visit: www palm com/environment
•
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech or
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the
following sources:
Caution: avoid potential hearing loss
American Academy of Audiology
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300
Reston, VA 20190
Voice: (800) 222-2336
Email: info@audiology.org
Internet: www audiology org
Prolonged exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most
common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research
suggests that using portable audio devices, such as portable music
players and cellular telephones, at high volume settings for long
durations may lead to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This
includes the use of headphones (including headsets, earbuds and
Bluetooth® or other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound
has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in
the ear), hypersensitivity to sound and distorted hearing. Individual
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and other potential
hearing problems varies.
National Institute on Deafness and Other
Communication Disorders
National Institutes of Health
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320
Bethesda, MD USA 20892-2320
Voice: (301) 496-7243
•
The amount of sound produced by a portable audio device varies
depending on the nature of the sound, the device, the device
settings and the headphones. You should follow some
commonsense recommendations when using any portable audio
device:
Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Hubert H. Humphrey Bldg.
200 Independence Ave., SW
Washington, DC 20201
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4674)
•
•
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest
volume at which you can hear adequately.
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to
you can hear what you are listening to.
Precaution against hearing loss
Protect your hearing. Listening to this device at
full volume for a long period of time can damage
your hearing.
•
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background
environmental noise.
A pleine puissance, l'écoute prolongée du
baladeur peut endommager l'oreille de l'utilisateur. Consultez notre
•
•
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases,
less time is required before your hearing could be affected.
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.
I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D L E G A L I N F O R M A T I O N
259
I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D L E G A L I N F O R M A T I O N
260
Specifications
Radio
•
CDMA 800MHz (digital cellular), 1900MHz (PCS), and
1400MHz (GPS)
•
EVDO and 1xRTT
Phone features
•
•
•
•
•
Speakerphone
Hands-free headset jack (2.5mm, 3 or 4-barrel connector)
Microphone mute option
TTY/TDD compatible
3-way calling
®
Processor
technology
Intel XScale processor, 312MHz
Expansion
Battery
mini-SD card slot
•
•
•
Rechargeable lithium ion
Removable for replacement
3.5 hours full charge time
Palm OS® version
Palm OS 5.4.9
Camera (camera
version only)
•
•
•
•
Still image capture resolution (1280 x 1024), 1.3 megapixel
2x digital zoom
Video capture resolution (352 x 288)
Automatic light balance
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
261
Size
5.08 in. x 2.28 in. x 0.89 in. (129mm x 58mm x 22.5mm) with
antenna
Weight
6.4 ounces (180 grams)
Connectivity
•
•
IR
®
Bluetooth wireless technology (1.2 compliant)
Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)
65,536 colors (16-bit color)
Display
•
•
•
User-adjustable brightness
Keyboard
•
•
Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator
Backlight for low lighting conditions
Included software
•
Phone (including Palm OS®
Favorites, Dial Pad)
My Treo® software
•
•
•
•
•
•
Contacts
Memos
•
•
Tasks
Pics&Videos (includes
camera and camcorder)
Voice Memo
Documents-To-Go®
•
Messaging (text and
multimedia)
Calculator Basic and
Advanced
•
•
•
•
Web browser (Internet)
Pocket Tunes™
Wireless Sync
Calendar
•
•
World Clock
Palm® Desktop software and
®
HotSync manager
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
262
System
requirements
•
Windows 2000, XP Service Pack 2, or Media Edition 2005
with USB port
•
•
Mac OS 10.2 –10.3 with USB port
Later versions may also be supported
32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)
Operating and
storage
temperature range
•
•
5% to 90% relative humidity (RH)
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
263
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
264
calculator 180
Call Log 48
corporate mail servers and
Index
command buttons 33
corporate groupware
information 196
corporate servers 222
Dial Pad 45, 53, 66
Favorites pages 47
files 171, 222
HotSync Manager 194
information 216
items on expansion cards
items on pick lists 35
Palm online support 9
Pocket Tunes 149
Quick Tour 9
forwarding calls and 57
getting support for 9
Internet providers and 83
setting preferences for 97
voicemail and 50
Accounts command 97
Acrobat file formats 171
activating
items on screen 33
smartphone device 20
Active Call View screen 54,
ActiveSync 197
SYMBOLS
! in Tasks list 167
NUMERICS
1xRTT (single carrier) radio
transmission technology
24-hour clock 209
3G2 files 140, 144
3GP files 140
911 Only option 72
Add Bookmark command
Add Call button 53, 55
A
AC charger 16
Access Powered devices 9,
accessing
Alert screen 179
World Clock 164
accessories 13
Add Song button 150
Add to album command 143
alternate character list 38
alternate characters 37
application menus 34
applications 40, 54
See also email accounts
conference calls and 56
additional security 219
attachments 93–94
I NDE X
265
Bluetooth devices 63–64,
bookmarks 117
videos to albums 143
voice memos 174
wallpaper 143
Advanced Mode command
agenda lists 155
business cards 155
caller ID photos 70, 153
captions to photos 136,
Address Bar pick list 117
addresses
Alarm check box 158
Alarm Sound pick list 162,
categories for applications
cities to World Clock 164
contacts 153
email addresses 92
emoticons 102
events 157, 158
expansion cards 198
favorite buttons 58–60
hands-free devices 65
memos 173
assigning to favorite
buttons 60
highlighting email 33
multimedia messages and
sending email and 92
synchronizing 237
viewing website 122
web links and 115
alarm tones 162
alarms
See also alerts
adding to calendar 158,
recording sounds for 163
setting for clock 164
Album command 143
video albums
alert icon 76
phone numbers 54
pictures to albums 143
playlists 150
private entries 218
QuickText phrases 102
signatures 100
adjusting volume
alarm tones 162
music 149
ringer 69
video clips 138
voice memos 175
Advanced Mode (calculator)
Alert Sound pick list 99
alerts
See also alarms
clearing 180
tasks 165
TTY/TDD devices 73
displaying 179
I N D E X
266
including message text in
receiving messages and
categorizing 211
changing screen fonts for
synchronization defaults
for 27
responding to 51, 106
aligning the screen 209
alternate characters list 38
anniversaries 159
Answer button 49
antenna 257
closing 39
copying 201
troubleshooting 225
viewing information about
viewing menus for 34
viewing tips for 9
Applications button 13, 40,
Applications View
defined 253
displaying applications in
opening applications and
overview 40
appointments 157, 238
See also events
Archive folder 184
area conversions 181
arrow icons 31
copying text to 121
disabling synchronization
for 191
finding text in 179
getting help with 184
applets 115
application buttons 39
application categories 40
application list view 211
Application pick list 207
application preferences 211,
applications
See also specific built-in
applications
managing 171
moving around in 29
playing music and 149
recently used 40
running on expansion
cards 249
accessing 40
ASF files 140
assigning to Quick Keys
associating with buttons
sending over Bluetooth
connections 187
setting default 213
switching 53
Attach image option 104
Attach ringtone option 105
Attach Signature check box
beaming 189
I NDE X
267
Attach voice memo option
attachments
displaying 95
downloading 95
Auto naming pick list 139
Auto Sync dialog box 98
auto sync failures 99
Auto-complete check box
basics 9
battery
disposing 231
installing 15
maximizing life of 18, 44,
Auto-hide Toolbar option 141
automated voicemail
systems 50
automating tasks 58
Auto-off After pick list 221
viewing status of 18
battery door release 14
battery icons 18, 77
Beam Business Card
command 155
multiple files and 93
removing 93
storing large 249
video clips as 93, 138
voice memos as 175
attendee information 159
audio 207
See also multimedia
messages;music;voice
memos
Audio Caption command 136
audio captions
background music and
playing 140
Audio icon 140
Auto answer pick list 65
Auto Lock Device box 217
AVI files 140
Beam Category command
B
Beam command 189, 190
Beam From pick list 190
Beam Receive pick list 222
Beam Status dialog box 189,
beaming
battery life and 19
defined 253
troubleshooting 189, 190
turning off 222
bell 179, 232
billing statements 58
birthdays 159
Background check box 161
background music 141
backing up information 23,
backlight icon 208
Backspace key 36
Backup folder 185, 226
Basic Mode (calculator) 180
Basic Mode command 180
I N D E X
268
blank screens 231
blank text messages 102
blank time slots 161
Blazer application
See also web browser
Blazer web browser 115,
See also web browser
blinking bell 179, 232
Bluetooth application
opening 63
receiving phone calls and
sending applications over
sending information over
setting up 63–64
BroadbandAccess
connections
setting up 126
troubleshooting 246
viewing status of 76
BroadbandAccess
technology 253
browsing files 200
browsing
troubleshooting 243
visibility options for 130
Bluetooth icon 63
built-in applications 9, 181,
sending from 187
See also applications;
specific application
built-in security software 213
Business Card command
setting up connections
visibility options in 187
Bluetooth devices
BMP files 139
applications
Bookmark Page icon 119
bookmark pages 119
buttons
Bookmarks View icon 118
border glow (highlight) 32
brightness duration
See also favorite buttons
accessing command 33
changing defaults for 212
customizing 212
highlighted on screen 32
opening applications with
disabling or enabling 19,
incoming calls and 52
BroadbandAccess Connect
I NDE X
269
restoring factory defaults
for 212
View) 136
speed-dialing with 47
Buttons Preferences screen
displaying events 67
overview 155
setting alarms from 158
setting default view 161
setting display options in
Calendar views 156
Call Log button 48
Call Log screen 48, 54
call waiting 55
Call Waiting dialog box 55
calling plans 58
camcorder 137, 138
camcorder buttons 138
Camcorder icon 136
Camera icon 135
camera lens 14
Cancel button 92
Cancel button (Active Call) 52
Cancel Spkr button 52
cancelling menu selection 34
C
cache 123, 250
calculator 37, 180
Calculator icon 180
calculator modes 180
calendar
See also Calendar
application
customizing 161–162
deleting events from 160
displaying 156
saving 107
selecting alarm tones for
Card Info button 202
card readers 148
carrying cases 232, 242
cascading style sheets 116,
categories
adding ringtones for 70
beaming and 189, 190
color-coding in 160
contacts and 154
memos and 173
naming 211
viewing tasks on 161
Calendar application
changing fonts for 208
changing views for 156
color-coding events 160
camera 135, 138
troubleshooting 248
I N D E X
270
receiving from Bluetooth
and 188
screen fonts 208
wallpaper 45
See also World Clock
closing
sending over Bluetooth
connections 186
Category command 211
category marker 162
CDs 148
Center button 13
certificates 115
web page layouts 116
character entry 36, 37, 38,
character limits
memos 173
text messages 102
character searches 179
charge indicator 13, 17
charger cable 17
charging
application menus 34
applications 39
pick lists 35
color palette 138
Color Theme Preferences
screen 210
color-coded category marker
Change Lock Code option
color-coding events 160
changing
bookmarks 118
charging status 18
command buttons 33
button defaults 212
contact information 154
default applications 212
email accounts 97
events 160
favorite buttons 60
frequency bands 74
information 21
Chat screen 108
Chat view 108
Choose Songs button 149
Choose Songs command
completion dates 168
components (Treo
smartphone) 8
Compose dialog box 102,
city information 163, 164,
Compress Day View check
box 161
lock codes 216
owner information 219
playlists 150
City pick list 164
compressed files 182, 183
computers
BroadbandAccess
Connect and 124
Clear Cache button 123
Clear Cookies button 123
QuickText phrases 102
I NDE X
271
connecting smartphone to
downloading applications
to 183
installing applications from
installing synchronization
software on 25
to computers 26
to virtual private networks
to websites 115, 123,
connections
changing frequency bands
for 74
assigning caller IDs to 70,
creating 153
deleting 155
editing 154
entering phone numbers
for 54, 59
looking up 59
messaging preferences
for 110
marking as private 154
saving 107
transferring information to
transferring multimedia to
transferring music from
Con button (calculator) 181
Conf button 56
Confirm message deletion
check box 109
conflicting applications 225
conflicting events 161
connecting
headsets 61–62
to Bluetooth devices 62,
receiving information over
Bluetooth 187
restrictions for 53
sending information over
Bluetooth 186
setting up Bluetooth 193
troubleshooting 240, 246
TTY devices and 73
unsupported 128
scrolling through 32
synchronizing 153, 196,
viewing details about 47
Contacts application
adding events to 159
changing fonts for 208
opening 153
synchronizing information
in 27
Contacts button 153
contracts 7
constants 181
Contact Edit dialog box 153
contact names 46
contacts
See also Contacts
application
conversion functions
(calculator) 180, 181
Copy button 142, 201
adding photos to 143
I N D E X
272
Copy Items dialog box 142
Copy items to pick list 142
Copy to command 142
Copy To pick list 201
copying
creating
albums 143
bookmarks 117
business cards 155
caller ID photos 70, 153
current events 67
Current Privacy pick list 218,
customer service (Verizon) 9,
applications 201
customer support (Palm) 9
music files 147
categories for applications customizing
applications 210–211
phone numbers 45
photos 142
text 121
cities for World Clock 164
contacts 153
buttons 212
calendar 161–162
camera 138
user folders 226
videos 142
email 115
chat sessions 109
email 97–101
Keyguard 214
messaging options 109
system date and time 220
system sounds 207–208
tasks 168
email messages 92
events 157, 158
memos 173
multimedia messages
playlists 150
private entries 218
QuickText phrases 102
signatures 100
copyrighted materials 141
corporate groupware
information 196
corporate servers 27
See language settings
coupling 240
web browser 121–123
D
daily events 156
Daily Repeating Events
check box 162
daily schedules 156
data service icons 244, 245
tasks 165
Coverage in/out pick list 69
crashes 232
Create chats from messages
pick list 109
text messages 102–103
voice memos 174
wallpaper 143
current date and time 163
I NDE X
273
databases 179
Date & Time Preferences
screen 220
date formats 209
date preferences 220
Date stamp pick list 138
dates
adding to photos 138
changing event 160
completed tasks and 167,
selecting 157
setting due 166
setting system 220
sorting on 107
decompression utilities 183
Default Alarm pick list 163
Default Apps Preferences
screen 213
default settings 212
Default View pick list 161
degrees 181
delays 217
Delete command 97, 144,
delete confirmation
messages 109
Delete Contact command
cookies 123
device names 24
events 160
files 249
memos 173
music from playlists 150
passwords 218
playlists 150
tasks 168
Desktop software;
software
Details button 33
Details command 143
Delete events older than pick
list 160
Delete From pick list 185
synchronizing 220
datestamps 138
Day display options 161
daylight savings 164
Daylight Savings Time check
box 164
Delete Old command 97
Delete Task command 168
deleting
alerts 180
attachments 93
bookmarks 118
contacts 155
Bluetooth devices and 63
devices
entering passkeys and 64
devices; hands-free
devices; smartphone
Dial another call prompt 55
Dial button 48
decimal display formats
(calculator) 181
I N D E X
274
Dial Extra Digits
system sounds 207
the touchscreen 214, 215
web page images 116,
current date and time 163
error messages 251
event categories 162
items in pick lists 35
on-device guide 9
overdue tasks 156
personal calendar 156
Automatically option 60
Dial Number dialog box 48
Dial Pad 37, 45, 66
Dial Pad button 53
Dial Preferences screen 71
dialog boxes
accessing command
buttons on 34
defined 254
discovery 188
discovery results list 129
Discovery Results screen
discussion groups 9
disk space (smartphone) 249
Display my name in chat
window as entry field 110
Display Options command
getting help with 9
highlighted buttons in 32
digital cameras 139
See also camera
private entries 219
Quick Tour 9
dimming keyboard backlight
Display Options dialog box
signal strength 75
slide shows 141
Disable cookies check box
Disable JavaScript check box
disabling
Add New Number prompt
displaying
alerts 179
unread messages 77,
video recording time 137
voicemail messages 76
web addresses 122
web pages 115, 117
DOC files 171
alternate characters 38
application information
application menus 34
applications 211
Bluetooth devices 19, 64
cookies 122
attachments 95
bookmarks 118
Keyguard 43, 214
synchronization 191
contacts information 47
I NDE X
275
Documents icon 172
Documents To Go icon 172
Documents To Go software
downloading
applications 119, 183
attachments 95
email 83
email messages 98
files 119, 182
ringtones 67
support information 9
Wireless Sync software
Downloads bookmark 119
downward-pointing arrows
E
creating 92, 115
defining favorite buttons
for 60
deleting 96, 249
dialing from 47
forwarding 95, 96
leaving on server 85
removing attachments for
replying to 95, 96
requirements for 7
resending 92
eBooks 23
echoes 240
EditBookmarkListdialogbox
Edit Bookmarks command
Edit Favorites Button
command 60
Edit Favorites Pages
command 59, 61
Edit Playlist dialog box 150
edit screens 34
editing. See changing
Effects pick list 138
email
retrieving 94
scrolling 95
scrolling through 32
selecting default
application for 213
setting alerts for 99
sort options for 96
storing attachments 249
synchronizing 82, 196,
adding multiple addresses
to 60
adding signatures 100
attaching photos to 93,
attaching ringtones 93
attaching videos to 93,
Drafts button 92
drained battery icon 18
Draw on Photo command
drawing tools 136
drivers 195
Due Date pick list 166
troubleshooting 244
viewing attachments 95
attaching voice memos to
I N D E X
276
viewing status of 96
viewing unread messages
for 156, 161
email accounts
changing 97
lock codes 215, 216
scheduling repeating 159
setting alarms for 158,
setting email preferences
and 97
synchronizing 156, 196,
setting up 91, 101
email options 92, 96
tasks 165
text 36, 173
URLs 122
web addresses 117
troubleshooting 238–239
viewing categories of 162
viewing duration of 161
Evolution Data Optimized
(EVDO) technology 254
Exchange ActiveSync 101
Exchange Address Book 237
Exchange Servers 101
Microsoft Exchange
Servers
emoticons 102
envelope icon 97
empty battery icon 18
empty time slots 161
emptying Trash folder 97
Enable background play
check box 149
Enable Voice Privacy check
box 72
Eng(x) display format 181
engineering notation 181
entering
erasing information 232
error messages 251
Escalate ring tone volume
check box 67
EVDO broadband technology
event conflicts 161
expansion card slot 14, 198
expansion cards
accessing items on 200
adding 198
beaming from 190
copying applications to
decimal values 181, 209
email addresses 92
changing 160
color-coding 160
deleting 160
copying music to 147
I NDE X
277
copying photos or videos
to 142
deleting applications on
displaying albums on 139
downloading to 119
formatting 202
inserting 198, 199
installing applications on
managing files on 200
moving files to 23
opening applications on
opening files on 172
renaming 202
sending attachments to 95
storing information on 23,
transferring applications
from 201
Extra Digits option (Add
Favorites) 60
deleting 249
movingtoexpansioncards
opening 172
saving 172
F
fade setting 161
Fast Mode (web browser)
favorite buttons
adding 58–60
defined 254
dialing with 47
editing 60
streaming 120
Files application 200
financial calculator 180
financial functions 181
Find dialog box 179
Find More button 179
Find Text on Page command
organizing 61
specifying number of 67
transferringtosmartphone
features (Treo smartphone)
feedback 240
file types
multimedia 103
pictures 139
videos 140
files
attaching to email 93, 94
browsing 200
finding
chat sessions 108
specific characters 179
text 121, 179
web pages 117
firewalls 222
Fixed display format 181
Flash mode 57
flight mode 44
Float display format 181
folder pick list 96
viewing information about
Extended Network message
extensions (phone) 53, 60
Extra Digits button (Active
Call View) 53
I N D E X
278
switching between email
Font command 116
Font size pick list 208
Format Card command 203
Formats Preferences screen
G
hardware 8
headset button 49, 62
headset jack 14
headsets
See also hands-free
devices
connecting to smartphone
entering passkeys for 131
receiving calls and 49, 52
hearing-impaired services 73
Game Volume pick list 207
GIF files 139
Glossary 253
GPS receivers 131
gradients 181
grouping photos or videos
groupware 101
formatting
H
expansion cards 202
formatting expansion cards
HAC setting 73
hands-free devices
adding 65
forums 9
forwarding
email 95, 96
connecting to 62
entering passkeys for 64
passkeys and 63
receiving phone calls and
troubleshooting 243–244
Hands-free Preferences
screen 65
Hands-free Setup button 63
Hang Up All button 52
hexadecimal characters 181
Hide Records option 218
hiding
blank time slots 161
information in entry
screens 218
Pics&Videos toolbar 141
private entries 218
web browser toolbar 120
High Priority command 103,
forwarding phone calls 57
freeing disk space
(smartphone) 249
frequency bands 74
From pick list 201
full charge (battery) 16
high speed data transfer 253
highlighted buttons 32
I NDE X
279
highlighting
applications 40
Ignore button 50
Ignore with Text button 50
images
disabling web page 116,
downloading 119
saving 107, 120
selecting as wallpaper 66
troubleshooting 248
uploading 104
IMAP servers 84
importing phone numbers
Info screens 185
information
accessing 216
beaming 189
changing 21
erasing all 232
hard resets and 217
marking as private 218–
receiving over Bluetooth
connections 187
favorite buttons 47
items in pick lists 35
items on screen 32
menu items 34
phone numbers 48
text 33, 121
web links 33, 116
hints 217
History command 121
History list 121
Hold button 52, 55
holidays 159
home city 163
home page 122
home page icon 117, 122
HotSync Log 235
sending over Bluetooth
connections 186
Inbox 33, 94, 111
synchronizing 21, 25, 27,
Incoming dialog box 99
HotSync Setup button 194
HotSync technology 254
links
incoming messages 111
Incompatible Apps directory
defined 254
location of 14
synchronizing with 195,
I
icons 117, 211
I N D E X
280
infrared transmission 254
inserting expansion cards
installer 182
installing
applications 181–183,
Palm Desktop software
smartphone battery 15
synchronization software
third-party applications
Internet connections 116,
troubleshooting 246
Internet email accounts 83
interruptions 251
Into album pick list 142
invalid characters 102
IR port
beaming from 189, 190
defined 254
location of 14
items in pick lists 35
items on screen
activating 33
dialing with 45
entering information from
illustrated 36
incremental searches
from 46
locking 214
restoring factory defaults
Keyguard 214
Keyguard Preferences
screen 214, 215
Known Caller pick list 67
VPN clients 222
VZAccess Manager
software 124
L
highlighting 32
selecting 33
Label color pick list 110
language selection screen
laptops 194, 195
large attachments 249
length functions 181
liability ii
lightning bolt icons 18, 77
Li-ion battery 254
See also battery
alternate characters
World Clock
language settings
See also web browsing;
websites
J
Java applets 115
JavaScript elements 122
JPG files 139
K
keyboard
accessing alternate
characters on 37
I NDE X
281
links 106
See also web links
list screens
See also pick lists
accessing command
buttons on 33
highlighting items in 33
selecting items on 32
list view (applications) 211
listening to
locations, disabling/enabling
transmission of 72, 73
lock codes 215, 216
Lock Device dialog box 217
locking
keyboard 214
phone 215–216
touch-sensitive features
Treo smartphone 216,
M
M4V files 140
Mac systems
installing applications from
installing synchronization
software on 25
installing to expansion
cards and 184
listening to music and 145
removing applications and
requirements for 22
synchronization defaults
for 27
synchronizing with 192,
transferring music from
voice captions 140
voice memos 174
Lithium Ion battery
See also battery
Lithium ion battery 254
logging in to corporate
servers 222
logic functions 181
Lookup button 59
loops 228
losing
Lost Password option 219
Lotus Domino servers 196
Lotus Notes 197
Local button 194
local weather reports 84
locating
chat sessions 108
specific characters 179
text 121, 179
web pages 117
Location On option 72
uninstalling desktop
software and 235
upgrading and 24
user folders on 226
magnet 14
low coverage areas 240
lowercase letters 36
Mail Service pick list 91
Manage Playlists command
I N D E X
282
map (World Clock) 164
maps (web pages) 248
marking information as
private 218–219
removing memos with
synchronizing information
in 27
dialing from 47
displaying status of 111
displaying unread 77, 156,
including in alerts 109
invalid characters in 102
memory consumption and
Mask Records option 218
Memos list 33
Menu button 13
mathematical functions 181
maximizing battery life 18,
media features 19
freeing 184, 249
memory slots (calculator)
Menu key 34, 36
menu shortcuts 34
menus 34
Message command 49
message lists 108
Message Tone pick list 111
messages
See also multimedia
messages; text
messages
paging from 102
previewing 105
retrieving 51, 76
saving 103
scrolling through 32
selecting phone numbers
in 48
setting colors for 110
setting preferences for
memos
See also notes
creating 173
adding graphical elements
to 103
deleting 173
recording 173
adding multiple recipients
for 60
specifying priority settings
for 103, 105
scrolling through 32
sending voice 105
Memos application
changing fonts for 208
entering text in 173
overview 169
arranging in folders 107
chat sessions and 108
checking status of 76, 77
defining favorite buttons
for 60
troubleshooting 244, 245
Messages page
(Preferences) 109
messaging 79
See also text messages
Messaging application
See also text messages
deleting 107, 109
I NDE X
283
changing fonts for 208
creating chat sessions
from 108
creating multimedia
messages with 104
creating text messages
with 102
Microsoft Exchange
Microsoft Exchange Servers
See Documents
application
Move to command 142
moving
bookmarks 119
favorite buttons 61
moving through web pages
customizing 109
MP3 files 147
opening 39
overview 101
Outlook
MP3 formats 145
MP4 files 140
MPEG-4 formats 144
MPG files 140
multi-connector pin 14
multimedia file types 140
multimedia files 103, 139
multimedia messages
See also Messaging
application
addressing 104
attaching photos to 135,
attaching videos to 138,
attaching voice memos to
Windows systems
Microsoft Word documents
mini-SD expansion card slot
sorting messages in 107
status indicators for 111
viewing multimedia
messages in 106
messaging applications 213
Messaging Inbox 33
messaging, troubleshooting
metric values 181
Microphone pick list 138
Microsoft Excel
mini-SDcards 261
(phone) 58
mirror 14
MMS messaging services
See also multimedia
messages
MMS Receipts pick list 109
mobile networks 240
Month display options 162
Month View 156, 162
checking status of 77
creating 103, 104
deleting 107
spreadsheets 171
I N D E X
284
dialing from 47
displaying details of 107
memory consumption and
playing 106
previewing 105
selecting alert tones for
selecting text in 107
sending 101, 105
setting delivery
memory consumption and
pausing 149
selecting 149
stopping 149
troubleshooting 246
NationalAccess technology
See also 5-way navigator
Network page (Preferences)
network preferences 110
New Bookmark dialog box
uploading 147
music file types 119
music files 145, 147, 249
music subscription services
mute button 53
New button 33
confirmation for 109
troubleshooting 245
viewing 106
multimedia messaging
Multimedia Messaging
System (MMS) 255
multiple recipients 60, 102
music
adjusting volume 149
answering phone calls and
changing playlists for 150
creating playlists for 150
downloading 119
listening to 145, 149
New Message dialog box 92,
N
names
New message pick list 109
Next Song button 149
No Service message 19, 75
Normal Mode (web browser)
Note button 154
notes
See also memos
adding to contact
information 154
sorting on 107
synchronizing and 233
naming
categories 211
messages for chat
sessions 110
photo albums 135
photo groups 139
playlists 150
adding to events 160
adding to tasks 166
scrolling through 32
storing 173
video albums 137
NationalAccess connections
I NDE X
285
See also alerts
number formats 209
numbers
calculator display options
for 181
World Clock 164
operating system
time zones and 157
Wireless Sync application
and 196
Outlook folders 237
owner information 219
Owner Preferences screen
(smartphone) 22
operating systems (PCs) 22
Optimized Mode (web
browser) 115, 116
Option button 39
Option key indicator 37
Option Lock indicator 37
Option Lock mode 37, 102
options in pick lists 35
entering from keyboard
O
offline synchronization 237
offline viewing (web) 118
OK button 33
online forums 9
online support 9
opening
Alert screen 179
application menus 34
Bookmarks View 118
Call Log 48
Dial Pad 45, 53, 66
email applications 247
files 172
P
page icon 111
paging 102
partnerships
Palm Desktop software
defined 255
device names in 254
entering information with
forgetting passwords and
installing 22, 183, 227
Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync and 198
multipleappointmentsand
Outbox 111
Outbox button 92
outgoing messages 112
outgoing phone calls 55
Outlook
duplicate entries in 237
entering information with
Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync and 197
multipleappointmentsand
History list 121
HotSync Manager 194
Pocket Tunes 149
Quick Tour 9
multiple contacts and 153
I N D E X
286
multiple contacts and 153
reinstalling 237
entering 51
connecting smartphone to
synchronizing with 27,
time zones and 157
troubleshooting 227, 234
upgrades and 24
owner information and
smartphone and 217
Paste command 45, 121
pasting
phone numbers 45
text 121
Pause button 149
pausing
music 149
streamed content 120
video recording 138
computers
downloading applications
to 183
installing applications from
installing synchronization
software on 25
quarantined files on 22,
transferring information to
transferring multimedia to
transferring music from
See also information
personal information
managers 227, 255
personal schedules 155
personalizing smartphone
See also preferences
phone
See also phone calls
answering 49, 52
Wireless Sync application
and 197
PALM folder 135, 137
Palm online support 9
Palm OS software 22
Palm OS-compatible
applications 182
Palm Software Installation
CD 8, 25
paper clip icon 93, 95
paragraphs, selecting 33
partial battery icon 18
Password box 217, 219
password hints 217
passwords
PDB (Palm OS) databases
PDF files 94, 171
pending alerts 106
pending messages 108, 112
personal computers
BroadbandAccess
Connect and 124
caution for 218
changing 218, 219
deleting 218
dialing 53, 60
I NDE X
287
changing frequency bands
conference calls and 56,
dialing 45–48, 53, 121
dialing preferences for 71
getting started with 19
hands-free devices and
locking 215–216
maximizing batterylife and
customizing 66
dialing from 48
displaying events in 156
enabling privacy settings
from 72
finding contacts from 46
overview 41
selecting wallpaper for 66,
selecting wireless bands
from 74
setting alert tones 68
setting ringtones 67
setting TTY/TDD
connections 73
encrypting 72
forwarding 57
keyboard backlight and 36
making 45, 53, 55, 57
placing on hold 52, 55
restrictions for 53
running applications and
sending to voicemail 50
switching between active
text messages and 106
transmitting location
during 72
privacy settings for 72
selecting alert tones for
selecting ringtones for 67,
service carrier for 7
status icons for 74–77
turning HAC on/off 74
Phone button 13, 39
viewing details about 58
viewing status of 55
light
troubleshooting 240–242
turning on and off 43, 44
viewing Call Log for 48
viewing minutes usage for
Phone application
accessing Dial Pad in 45,
phone calls
See also phone; phone
numbers
adding a second 55
adjusting volume for 20,
automatically answering
Phone Info command 21
Phone Info screen 21
Phone Lock 215, 216
Phone Lock command 215
phone numbers
adding 54
assigning prefix to 71
copying 45
adding caller IDs 70
disabling screen for 215
I N D E X
288
dialing extra digits with 53,
getting device 21
highlighting 33
attaching to multimedia
messages 104
backing up 144
copying 142
deleting 136, 144
displaying information
about 143
copying pictures and
videos in 142
creating wallpaper with
hiding toolbar in 141
opening 139
organizing media with 143
removing photos or videos
from 144
importing 166
pasting into Dial Pad 45
redialing most recent 48
saving 54
downloading 119
grouping 140
selecting 48
personalizing 136
positioning on screen 140
removing from albums
rotating 143
saving 136
scrolling through 32
selecting as backgrounds
rotating photos in 143
sending pictures or videos
from 141
synchronizing information
in 27
viewing pictures in 139
viewing slide shows in
phone off icon 75
Phone Off message 19, 44,
phone on icon 75
Phone Preferences
command 72
Phone Preferences screen
viewing videos in 140
phone-off icon 44
photo albums 135, 139, 142,
Photo Settings screen 138
photos
See also pictures
adding as wallpaper 143
adding captions to 136
adding to albums 143
adding to contacts 143
setting default size 138
setting preferences for
picture formats 139
Picture list 141
See also images; photos
PIM applications 7, 255
PIMs 227
plain text formats 96
Play button (Pocket Tunes)
storing 133
taking 135, 248
pick lists 32, 35
Pics&Videos application
I NDE X
289
prefixes (phone numbers) 71
Prefs icon 219
preinstalled applications 9,
playback
PPT files 171
PRC (Palm OS) applications
playing
precautions 258
See also applications;
specific application
presentations 171
preset delays 217
streamed content 120
video clips 138, 140
voice captions 140
voice memos 174
playlists 150
Playlists command 150
plug-ins 115
Pocket Tunes application
changing playlists in 150
creating playlists in 150
opening 147
playing music from 149
upgrading 145
POP protocols 100
POP servers 84
alarm tones 162
alert tones 68
buttons 212
calculator 181
preset passkeys 63, 129,
pressing keyboard keys 36
pressing onscreen buttons
previewing messages 105
Previous Song button 149
primary applications 39
primary button assignments
priority levels 165, 168
priority settings 103, 105
privacy flag 166
camcorder 138
camera 138
country-specific 209
dialing 71
hands-free devices 65
Keyguard 214
owner information 219
power settings 221
system colors 210
Privacy Mode check box 109
privacy settings 72
ports 26
Power Preferences screen
system sounds 207
tasks 168
progress indicator bar (video
recording) 138
web pages 121–123
Prompt sounds pick list 138
I N D E X
290
protecting personal
protecting Treo smartphone
Protocol pick list 91
proxy servers 123
pTunes icon 147
Purge command 107, 160
Purge pick list 108
purging old information 24
range (Bluetooth devices)
redialingmostrecentnumber
Rcl button (calculator) 181
readjusting the screen 209
receipts (messaging) 109
receiving phone calls 49, 55
recently viewed web page
icon 117
rechargeable battery 8
See also battery
battery
Record command 189
Record Completion Date
check box 168
Record new option 105
recorder 173
recording
ringtones 68
sounds 163
Records button 186
recovering lost passwords
repeating events
redirector (websites) 247
Refresh command 246
Refresh icon (web pages)
refreshing web pages 116,
reinstalling Palm Desktop
software 237
reinstalling third-party
applications 225, 226, 229
Reminder Sound pick list 163
reminders 158, 165
Remove from album
command 143
removing
alerts 180
attachments 93
bookmarks 118
contacts 155
cookies 123
device names 24
email 96, 249
Q
Quick Install 255
Quick Keys 60
Quick Tour documentation 9
QuickText button 102
QuickText phrases 102
R
radians 181
radio frequency emissions
random number generator
red paper clip icon 93
I NDE X
291
events 160
expansion cards 199
files 249
caution for 217
resizing text 116
Resolution pick list 138
resolution settings (camera)
restricting location
information 72
Return key 36
Review photos/videos pick
list 138
RF emissions 257
ringer
setting for phone 68
setting phone 67
roaming icon 75
Roaming message 75
Roaming pick list 68
memos 173
messages 107, 109
music from playlists 150
passwords 218
playlists 150
rotating photos 143
S
Save As command 172
Save as Contact command
Save as Wallpaper command
tasks 168
Rename Card command 202
Rename Memo command
Save List button 150
Save Page command 118
Save Picture command 107
Save Sound command 107
saved web page indicator
saving
calendars 107
contact information 107
files 172
images 107, 120
messages 103
renaming expansion cards
repeat intervals (events) 159
Repeat pick list 159, 163,
repeating alarms 163
repeating event icon 159
repeating events 159, 162
repeating tasks 166
replacingsmartphonebattery
rescheduling events 160
Reset Counters button 58
adjusting volume 69
silencing 50
turning off 207
ringtone file types 103, 119
Ringtone pick list 70
ringtones
recording 68
sending with messages
phone numbers 54
photos 136
playlists 150
I N D E X
292
video clips 138
voice memos 174
web pages 118
schedules 156
screen fonts 208
screen protectors 232
scroll arrows 95
scroll bars 32
selecting
alarm tones 162
chat sessions 108
dates 157
scrolling preferences 122
SD cards 261
SD_Audio folder 148
search results 179
searching for
favorite buttons 47
home city 163
items in pick lists 35
items on screen 33
menu items 34
Sci(x) display format 181
scientific notation 181
screen
accessing command
buttons on 33
activating items on 33
adjusting brightness 208,
aligning 209
automatically turning off
battery life and 19
locking 215
moving around on 29, 31
protecting 13, 232
scrolling through 32
troubleshooting 231–232
specific characters 179
text 121, 179
secondary applications 39
secure connections 128
secure web pages 116
security 64, 219
music 149
phone numbers 48
playlists 150
songs 149
time zones 157
web links 116
self-portrait mirror 14
Send button 13, 48, 92
Send command 187
Send From pick list 187
Send To Device droplet 147
sending
See also passwords;
privacy settings
Security button 217, 218
security certificates 115
Security dialog box 217
security software 213
Select Band command 74
Select Band dialog box 74
Select Font dialog box 208
Select Media screen 93
applications over
Bluetooth 187
waking up 43
calls to voicemail 50
I NDE X
293
informationoverBluetooth
Show Calendar event check
box 67, 156
Show Categories check box
signal strength indicator 44
signal-strength icon 44
signatures 100
to chat rooms 108
voice memos 175
Sent folder 111
service contracts 7
service providers 75, 81, 89
setting 161
check box 162
Show Category List check
box 161, 162
Show Completed Items
check box 168
silencing system sounds 50,
silencing the ringer 50
silent alerts 110
single carrier (1xRTT) radio
transmission technology
Show Due Dates check box
SIT files 182, 183
alarm clocks 164
settings (incompatible) 225
Setup Devices button 127,
box 67
slide show options 141
slide shows 141
slider 32
slides 103, 256
Slideshow Setting command
Show Priorities check box
smartphone
Shift/Find indicator 36
Shift/Find key 36, 179
Short Messaging Service
(SMS) 256
Show Address Bar check box
Show timestamps in chats
check box 110
Show Wallpaper option 66
Shutter sounds pick list 138
activating 20
adding additional security
for 219
battery life for 18
Signal faded pick list 69
I N D E X
294
components of 8
connecting Bluetooth
connecting to PCs 26
customizing 135, 156,
synchronization defaults
for 27
third-partyapplicationsand
transferring data to 23, 27
troubleshooting 9, 223,
turning on and off 16
unauthorized users and
managing 171
reinstalling 237
synchronization defaults
for 27
synchronizing information
and 25, 26
troubleshooting 227
uninstalling 235
updating 225
software conflicts 235
Sort by check box 168
Sort by Date command 107
Sort by Name command 107
documentation
conventions for 43
entering passkeys for 64
features illustrated 13–15
freeing memory for 184,
freeing space for 249
getting phone number for
unsupported connections
for 128
updating information on
headsets compatible with
locking 216, 217
navigating around on 29
overview 7
protecting 213–220
required items for 8
resetting 217, 228–229
setting up 16
specifications for 261
sorting
messages 96
SMS messaging services
See also text messages
soft resets 190, 228
software
See also Palm Desktop
software
accessing from web
browser 119
sorting messages 107
sorting tasks 168
Sound & Alerts Preferences
screen 162, 207
Sound icon 106
Sound Off 15
Sound Off position (ringer)
included with smartphone
installing 28, 182
Sound On position (ringer)
I NDE X
295
sound preferences 162
Sounds button 207
Space key 36
storing
information 23, 177, 198,
music files 148
notes 173
photos 133, 135
streaming files 120
removing applications and
selecting applications for
setting default application
for 212
troubleshooting 232–239
upgrading and 24
synchronization applications
synchronization software 21,
synchronizing
dates and time 220
photos and videos 144
time zones 220
with Bluetooth devices
speaker 14
speakerphone 52, 53
troubleshooting 240
special characters 37, 38,
specifications 261
speed-dialing buttons 47
Spkr-phone button 52
spreadsheets 79, 94, 171
Start With pick list 118
statistical functions 181
statistical information 185
status icons (email) 96
status icons (phone) 74–77
Sto button (calculator) 181
stopping
submitting web forms 116
support (Palm) 9
support (Verizon) 9
symbols 37, 38, 102
Syncautomaticallycheckbox
synchronizing
synchronization
ActiveSync and 101
device names and 24
overview 177
multimedia playback 107
music playback 149
video recording 137
with Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync 197
voice memo playback 175
storage solutions 177
storage space 23
preparing for 21
recommendations for 27
with Microsoft Outlook
I N D E X
296
with Wireless Sync 196,
temperature conversions
system colors 210
system dates and time 163,
system requirements (PCs)
marking as private 166
setting preferences for
temporary passwords 83
text
copying 121
resizing 116
viewing against photos
System Volume pick list 207
changing fonts for 208
opening 165
text fields 32, 35
T
Take new picture option 104
Take new video option 104
Tap and Drag check box 122
Task Details dialog box 165
tasks
See also events; Tasks
application
adding 165
in 27
text messages
See also messages
addressing 102
containing links 106
deleting 107
Tasks button 165
Tasks list 33, 156, 166, 167,
Tasks Preferences screen
TDD devices 73
technical support (Palm) 9
technical support (Verizon) 9,
telecommunications devices
dialing from 47
retrieving 77, 105
selecting alert tones for
special characters and 102
troubleshooting 244
assigning to attachments
checking off 166
phone calls
deleting 168
I NDE X
297
text messaging service 7
viewing 163
Trusted Pairs. See
partnerships
Text Telephone devices 73
third-party applications
compatibility with 22
deleting 23, 250
getting help with 184
searching in 179
transferring to expansion
cards 24
troubleshooting 31, 228,
third-party utilities 23, 219
third-party VPN client
software 222
time formats 209
TTY devices 73
TTY icon 73
time preferences 220
time slots (calendar) 161
Time Zone pick list 157
Timed Events check box 162
timestamps 110
TTY/TDD Mode icon 76
TTY/TDD pick list 73
turning on or off
Caps Lock 37
keyboard backlight 36
microphone 138
smartphone 16
speakerphone 52
Typing starts contacts search
option 66
Tips command 9
Touchscreen Preferences
screen 210
transmitting location 72
Trash folder 96
travel alarm 164
smartphone
trigonometric functions 181
troubleshooting 9, 223
U
unauthorized users 213
Unfiled category 188, 190
uninstalling
applications 184
Palm desktop software
third-party applications
Unknown Caller pick list 68
TIF files 139
time
scheduling events and
setting system 220
synchronizing 220
trusted devices 128
See also partnerships
Trusted Devices button 127,
I N D E X
298
unlocking
the keyboard 214
Treo smartphone 217
unread messages 77, 111,
User Guide 9
usernames 90
overview 88
responding to messages
from 95
sorting messages with 96
switching accounts from
V
Verizon Wireless
customer service for 9, 50
smartphone requirements
for 7
troubleshooting Internet
connections and 246
voicemail services and 50
voicemail system 50
Verizon Wireless onscreen
message 75
Untimed Events check box
updating
application software 225
system date and time 164
troubleshooting 225–226
uploading
images 104
music files 147
videos 104
uppercase letters 36
urgent messages 111
See also web links
USB hub 26
Version button 186
version numbers 186
video recording screen 137
Video Settings screen 138
videos
adding to albums 143
adjusting volume for 138
attaching to multimedia
messages 103
VersaMail
documentation for 88
VersaMail application
accessing email and 81,
adding attachments from
creating email messages
from 92
displaying attachments
with 95
backing up 144
copying 142
deleting 138, 144
displaying information
about 143
USB ports 26
Use color for pick list 110
user discussion groups 9
user folders 226, 233, 256
Exchange ActiveSync
accounts and 101
I NDE X
299
downloading 119
grouping 140
contacts information 47
jumping to specific
sections of 138
removing from albums
error messages 251
event categories 162
adding 136, 143
background music and
playing 140
saving 138
on-device guide 9
overdue tasks 156
personal calendar 156
photos 135, 138, 139,
Voice Memo list 174
voice memos 105, 174
voice privacy icon 72
voice quality 240
voicemail
setting default size of 138
setting preferences for
storing 133
uploading 104
View By pick list 211
viewing
private entries 219
Quick Tour 9
signal strength 75
slide shows 141
checking 76
retrieving messages 51,
sending calls to 50
setting up 50
voicemail (Verizon) 50
Voicemail Alert pick list 69
Voicemail button 50
voicemail page icon 111
Voicemail screen 51
volume
unread messages 77,
video recording time 137
voicemail messages 76
web addresses 122
web pages 115, 117
virtual private networks
(VPNs) 124, 222
alerts 179
alternate characters 38
application information
application menus 34
applications 211
attachments 95
bookmarks 118
alarm tones 162
alert tones 69
Visibility pick list 130, 187
I N D E X
300
music 149
ringer 69
ringtones 67
video clips 138
voice memos 175
volume conversions
(calculator) 181
volume preferences 207
VPN client software 222
VZAccess Manager icon 126
VZAccess Manager software
auto-completion options
for 122
beaming from 189
bookmarking and 117,
deleting cookies for 123
dialing phone numbers
from 48, 121
memory consumption and
requirements for 7
selecting default
application for 213
troubleshooting 245–248
web browsing service 7
web forms 116
hiding toolbar in 120
web links
assigning to favorite
buttons 60
creating email from 115
highlighting 33
Palm online support 9
selecting 116
web pages
changing fonts for 116,
changing layouts for 116
copying text from 121
dialing from 47
opening 39, 115
restrictions for 115
selecting default views for
selecting home page for
streamed content and 120
troubleshooting 246
unsupported elements for
See Blazer web browser;
web browser
web browser icons 116
web browsing
VZAccess Manager window
W
waking up screen 43
warranty 8
weather reports 84
web addresses 117, 122
See also URLs; web links
web browser
accessing email providers
and 81
disabling images for 116,
See also web browser
I NDE X
301
finding text on 121
loading 122, 247
locating most recent 117
opening from text
messages 106
opening History list for
saving 118
scrolling 116, 122
sending email from 115
setting initial view for 121
setting preferences for
viewing offline 118
web-based email 81
websites
See also web browsing
displaying addresses for
entering addresses for
opening Palm online
support 9
redirectors and 247
transactions and 248
Week View 156
weekly events 156
weight conversions 181
Wide Page Mode 116
Windows systems
wireless band selection 74
Bluetooth
devices hands-free
devices; smartphone
installing applications from Wireless Sync application
accessing email and 81,
documentation for 249
opening 39
overview 82
synchronizing with 196,
troubleshooting 244
Wireless Sync button 13, 39,
Wireless Sync server 83, 87
wizards 182
WMA formats 145
word searches 179
words, selecting 33
installing to expansion
cards and 184
listening to music and 145
removing applications and
requirements for 22
synchronization defaults
for 27
transferring music from
displaying recently visited
downloading files from
Windows Vista 9, 22
accounts; Verizon
Wireless
I N D E X
302
I N D E X
304
|
Uniden D1685 User Manual
Toshiba Solid State Drive MK2001GRZB User Manual
SIIG 04 0288E User Manual
Seagate SV35 SERIES ST3250824SV User Manual
Samsung Internal Hd Ssd Sata3 MZ7PD512Z User Manual(1)
Samsung I9300WHT User Manual
Panasonic SL CT580V User Manual
Palm TreoTM User Manual
Palm Treo 700w User Manual
Nokia 7260 User Manual